AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. In this case. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. When you place the cursor over a component. You can use this tri-pane. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. click Autodesk Revit Help. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. click . Click the Help button. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . click Modify. regarding selected components within a view. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. In the Status Bar. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. Toolbar: From the Toolbar." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. If there is no Help button displayed. find a keyword on the Index tab. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. It highlights when the cursor is over it. in conjunction with Tooltips.In the bottom left corner of the window. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. 20 Press TAB. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. There are several tools that help you find information. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. The Status Bar also provides information. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. Windows: From any window. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. 18 On the Design Bar.

this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. 11 . floors.including all windows. For learning purposes. common terms. and then add the passageway between them. You should understand the user interface. While creating your first building information model. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. If you have not already done so. Therefore. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial. you create the shell of the west wing . doors. all views and schedules instantly update. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. and a roof . before proceeding further.mirror it to create the east wing. For training purposes. review the tutorial. stairs. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. Understanding the Concepts. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model.

NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. modify. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. and a roof. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. at a later time. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. expand Views (all). ceilings. and double-click North. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels. When you create walls. Using the mirror tool. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. stairs. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . As you design the walls. click Open. Finally. After adding dimensions. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. and apply new wall types. You then add sketched components such as floors. After sketching the walls. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls.rvt located in the Metric folder. you use the west wing to create the east wing. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Level. In this exercise. you add and modify doors and windows. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. Open m_First_Project. expand Elevations. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. you can. click the Training Files icon. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. you create. and then add the passageway between them. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson.

provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. ■ Select . If you click the 3D control. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. click Modify. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. When you select Level 4. it terminates the command in progress. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. With the 3D designation. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. 8 Select Level 4. it toggles to 2D. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset.3 On the Options Bar. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. When you click Modify. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. In this view. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. the datum is in model extent mode. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. 5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset.

you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. mirroring it to create the east wing. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. North. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. In the steps that follow. use the wheel on your mouse. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu. Theoretically. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. there are four elevation symbols. In this view.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. West. and South elevation views. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point. which define the East. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. In such a case. a west wing. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. However. double-click Level 1. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. tool on the toolbar.

16 In the drawing area.Brick on CMU. and South elevation views are inactive. West. do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. Do not click the symbol. A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. Later in this tutorial. For training purposes. 18 In the Type Selector. North. This means that each view is infinite. select Basic Wall: Exterior . NOTE The far clip plane for the East. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. you use this command to modify the view. click Wall.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. click the Elevation: West symbol.

Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle.19 In the Options Bar. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. 24 On the View toolbar. click . The selected wall is red. . ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. click Modify. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. By clicking the arrows. and click to complete the rectangle. 22 Select the left. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. TIP If necessary. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. Also notice the dimension that displays.000 mm long. specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. Select the drawing tool.000 mm wide and 24. you can flip the wall orientation. as shown. This is a temporary dimension. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. vertical wall of the rectangle. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. you do not need to type the metric suffix. In addition. For example.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. You do not need to enter 12000 mm. TIP When entering a value. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER. 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 .

30 On the Design Bar. Notice the material settings. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 29 Draw a region around the corner. Notice the wall remains selected. it is displayed as solid fill. enter ZF.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. click Modify. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. 32 On the keyboard. The brick surface pattern displays. including the brick surface pattern displays. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. and click Hidden Line. as shown. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. click Zoom in Region. and click Shading with Edges. Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. click the Model Graphics Style control. 33 On the View Control Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control.

Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. click . only the wall that you selected would change. it has no effect on components that are not selected. For example. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. 35 On the Options Bar. you can see the list of type parameters. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. In the upper half of the dialog box. For example. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. which control the selected component or components. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. and then apply it to the remaining walls. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. To accomplish this. However. you create a new wall type. which control all components of the same type. modify it. In the steps that follow. If you change an instance parameter.

enter the new wall name. Therefore. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. the original wall type must remain unchanged. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. You can specify the sample height to any value you want. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 13500 for Sample Height. For training purposes.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. and click OK. click Preview. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. Exterior . click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 38 In the Name dialog box. click Edit. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box.36 In the Element Properties dialog box. under the Value column for Structure.

make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Verify that Base is selected for From. and click OK. In the Materials dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . click Add. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. This should be the interior finish layer. select Masonry .0 mm for Offset. Make sure the offset is a negative number. Click inside the Material field. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. select layer 9. Enter -50. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. When you select a layer. for View. 49 Under Layers. click Sweeps.Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. select Section: Modify type attributes. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. 42 Under the preview pane.Brick Soldier Course. under Name.

under Modify Vertical Structure. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that Base is selected for From. modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Select Masonry . and click OK. 58 Click Add. Verify that Base is selected for From. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. click Add. 52 For the second wall sweep. Verify that the Offset is zero. click Reveals. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Enter -50 mm for Offset. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Select Flip. 53 Click OK. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. 57 Click Apply.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Sweeps.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Make sure it is a negative number. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add.

Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 66 On the View toolbar. 64 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Verify that the Offset is zero. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . Select Flip. Verify that Base is selected for From. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. 65 On the View menu.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click . 60 Click OK. click OK. click OK. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views.

73 On the File menu. click .rvt. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. When finished. They do not have sweeps or reveals. 68 Enter ZF. 69 On the View toolbar. TIP To select multiple components. and click Save. This turns off thin lines globally. and click Shading with Edges. Also notice the button remains activated. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing.Brick on CMU. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. Notice that. click Save As. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 72 On the Design Bar. you add the interior walls of the west wing. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. 71 In the Type Selector. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. after the new wall type is applied. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress. click the Model Graphics Style control. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. click Modify. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . 67 On the View Control Bar. Exterior . 75 Proceed to the next exercise.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course.

under Floor Plans. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. Select the Line sketching tool. place the cursor over the north wall. under Views (all). and click. 4 In the Options Bar. m_First_Project-in_progress. click Wall. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall: Interior . .Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall. double-click Level 1. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. 6 Move the cursor down. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 .135mm Partition (2-hr). ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height.

press and hold CTRL. and select the second interior wall. Click to specify the wall start point. 8 Move the cursor down. TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. If you zoom into the model.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. click Modify. Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . the snap values decrease. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety.

On the Settings menu. select Basic Wall: Interior . 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time. 15 In the Type Selector. and under Colors. Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected.79mm Partition (1-hr).After the walls are selected. and enter 4750 mm. click Activate Dimensions. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . click a temporary dimension value. as shown. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. they display as red. click Wall. select Options. specify the selection color. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. click the Graphics tab. click Modify. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide.

as shown. If necessary. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model. The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall.

a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. 22 On the Tools toolbar. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. click Modify. 23 In the drawing area.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. click Modify. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split. When you are finished splitting the walls. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. and you can now split walls and lines. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. After splitting the wall. In the above illustration and callout. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. click . 20 Enter ZR. you can click on the View toolbar. 24 Click to split the wall. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. This places the view in thin lines mode. As you move the cursor over the wall.

29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click .26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 27 On the Standard toolbar. click Modify. and delete the segment. split the right corridor wall. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 30 Enter ZF. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit.

Creating Your First Building Model | 31 . . click . the inner segment is deleted automatically. Zoom in as necessary. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. 32 On the Options Bar. After the second split. click . 31 On the Tools toolbar. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. click 36 On the View toolbar. 35 On the View toolbar. select Delete Inner Segment.There are two remaining splits to make. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction. 33 Using the following illustration as a guide. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. Notice the interior walls that you added and split.

32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display.2. and click Duplicate. You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. For Pick.rvt. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. click Dimension.38 On the File menu. m_First_Project-in_progress. 2 In the Project Browser. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . enter Level 1 . Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. select Individual References. and components that require dimensioning. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines.5mm Arial. under Floor Plans. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. right-click Level 1. click Save. Level 1 . and click OK. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. 5 On the Options Bar. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. should be open. When you duplicate a view. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification.Dimensioned and Annotated. The floor plan. select Wall centerlines. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you add dimension lines to the building model. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Next.Dimensioned and Annotated. ■ ■ For Prefer. When geometry is selected for modification. Dimensioning the Building Model. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. ready for modification. This is the aligned dimension option. click Rename. In the final section of this exercise. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar. In that case. and in the context menu. 6 In the Type Selector. right-click Copy of Level 1. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . options.

When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. click to select it. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown.7 In the drawing area. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 .

This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. the value is not available for modification. the dimension value displays as modifiable. change it to 15000. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 17 Click the temporary dimension value. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. and press ENTER. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. Controls display on the value. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. on each witness line. Notice that the dimension value is not blue.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. change it to 4750. 12 Select the dimension line. and press ENTER. In its current state. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. Notice the selected wall moved to the left. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. or in the status bar of the drawing window. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. and a blue padlock displays. Information is displayed in a tooltip. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. Notice the dimension value turns blue. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. indicating that the control moves the witness line.

Click Options. click Dimension. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. vertical. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and click OK. select Wall centerlines. and click to place the dimension as shown. 23 Select the left. select Entire Walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Modify. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. For Pick.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. exterior wall. move the cursor to the left. select Intersecting Walls.

Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 26 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click Delete Witness Line. right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line.

Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . 28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. and in the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line. click Edit Witness Lines. it provides a different set of options on the context menu.

38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process.29 After selecting the wall. NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. or press ESC on the keyboard.

Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 . 31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm.

The relationship between these components is constrained. Notice a lock displays for each segment. if you move one component. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This dimension does not need to be precise. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension.

This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. In the final section of the exercise. double-click Level 1. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3. under Floor Plans. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. you add doors and windows to the building model. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . 38 On the Options Bar.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. click . you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model. You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. under Views (all). under Other. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. Next. Adding Doors and Windows. 40 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select Value for Equality Display. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. 41 On the File menu. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. select Save. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by adding single flush doors.

This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. 2 In the Type Selector.rvt. m_First_Project-in_progress. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. Regardless of the initial placement. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In addition. When you add a door. This is the mechanical room. Do not click at this time. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it. click Door. 3 In the north side of the building model. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the door resides on a level line. You can offset the door from the level. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. doors snap automatically to the closest available level.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. however.

5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. After you add door number 2. 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. specify a value of 600 mm. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). return the door to the position shown in the following illustration. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. The precise dimensions are not important. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. Press the Spacebar a second time. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . When you are finished. 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. Do not be concerned with exact placement. Notice the blue controls that display. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening. and press ENTER. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall.

rfa. 14 On the Options Bar. and select M_Double-Flush.rfa extension. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. click Load. and select M_Double-Glass 2.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown.rfa. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. click Door. Flip the door. 17 Press and hold CTRL. click Modify. as shown. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . to zoom to fit. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and set the temporary dimensions. All Revit Building families have an . 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. ZF. 11 On the Design Bar.

The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm.rfa. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. a preview image does not display. as shown. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm.You can load multiple families at the same time. and select M_Single-Flush Vision. 22 In the Type Selector. 18 Press and hold CTRL. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. When more than one family is selected. 20 In the Type Selector. Each door should open into the room. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary.

This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. The arrow has been added for training purposes. This is door number 14 in the following illustration. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. 26 In the Type Selector.

Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. and scroll down to Walls. If your view displays solid fill. 31 Click the Model Categories tab. 32 Expand the Walls category. double-click North. 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. 30 On the View menu. under Views (all). it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. select Visibility/Graphics. and clear Surface Pattern. under Elevations.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . zoom in until the brick pattern displays.

48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . When adding a door. Notice the door snaps to each level. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. You can apply an offset if required. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3. and down to Level 1. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. double-click Level 1. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. click Door. then Level 2. as shown. In this case. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls.33 Click OK. 35 In the Type Selector. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view.

Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . 40 On the Options Bar. as shown. click the double doors to add a tag. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. 41 On the upper exterior wall. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. TIP For each component type. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected. click Door. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. This should be door number 15. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. click Tag. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. clear Leader. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 44 In the Type Selector.

double-click Level 1.46 On the Design Bar. click Save. click . . 47 On the View toolbar. Like doors. 50 On the File menu. you can flip the window after placement. the window displays at the cursor. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 49 Spin the model. As you move the cursor over a wall. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Window. Windows are wall-hosted components. 54 In the Type Selector. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. click Modify. select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. and notice the doors you added. under Floor Plans. click 48 On the View toolbar. just like doors. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser.

57 On the Design Bar. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. and 3D views. the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. In the family editor. the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. and reload it into the project. go to Help. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window. elevation. click Modify. 61 On the Options Bar. 59 Zoom around the window. click Window. click . 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. IMPORTANT  If necessary. and select it. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. When you add a window in a plan view. materials. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters. click to place it as shown. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. In this project. and visibility. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor.You can add windows in plan. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. modify it. 58 On the View toolbar. as shown. click . click Cancel.

67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 71 On the Options Bar. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. click Modify. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. A tooltip is displayed. and select the three remaining windows. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. 70 On the Edit menu. In this case. you can pick or draw the mirror axis. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. click to select it. press and hold CTRL. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view. click . click Mirror. 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. The copy option is selected by default. and click to set the mirror axis. 74 Move the cursor to the left. When you mirror a component or components. and make sure Copy is selected. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

76 On the Design Bar. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . click Window.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. at the dimensions shown. You tag the windows later in the exercise.

80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall. For Move To. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. select 2nd. You then move the array to the second or last location. Clear Group And Associate. You first click a point to specify the array start point. Enter 5 for Number. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. and click to set the array end point. it is an ideal situation to use an array. 82 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Array. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 81 On the Edit menu. you can use the array tool to finish the job. and click to set the array start point. Creating an array is a three-step process. Select Constrain. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced.78 On the Design Bar.

If you make a mistake placing the array.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. click Window. and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar. undo the step and try again. as shown. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall.

turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. .87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. drag a selection box around the entire building model. click . Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 90 Spin the model. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. and notice the windows you added. you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Modify. 92 In the 3D Drawing area. on the View toolbar. click 89 On the View toolbar.

click Window. click Copy to Clipboard. notice the wall surface pattern displays. 95 On the Edit menu. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls. 98 On the Design Bar. 103 In the Project Browser. 93 On the Options Bar. press and hold CTRL. double-click North. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select Level 3. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. click Window. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box.This selects every component in the building model. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. under Elevations. 96 On the Edit menu. click Modify. 94 In the Filter dialog box. clear walls and doors from the selection. In this view. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. 101 On the Options Bar. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. double-click South. clear Tag on Placement. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. 104 On the Design Bar. 99 In the Project Browser. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. under Elevations. and click OK. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. such as equality constraints. select Level 2. click . Creating Your First Building Model | 57 .

110 On the File menu. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. and all require their borders to be sketched. roofs. double-click Level 1. click 2 On the View toolbar. Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. You can also select or draw lines. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Like walls. you can select walls to define the border of the component. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. each of these components can have a compound structure. select Window Tags.rvt. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. roof. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .106 In the Project Browser. click Save. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. When sketching these components. you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. or ceiling. . You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. In this exercise. When walls intersect a floor. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. under Floor Plans. and click OK. click . m_First_Project-in_progress. Floors. click Tag All Not Tagged.

7 On the Options Bar. When in sketch mode. the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.300mm for Type. click Finish Sketch. double-click Level 1. click . You are in sketch mode. click Floor. clear Extend into wall (to core). Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls.4 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. Sketch. and click OK. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Select Concrete . under Floor Plans. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. 14 On the View toolbar. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Design Bar now has only one tab. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. click the flip arrows to flip the line. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. In addition. You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. verify that Pick Walls is selected. click Floor Properties.

the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. 17 On the Options Bar. In this view. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. When the chain of walls highlights. Notice the location of the magenta line. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Floor. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. double-click Level 2. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. when it highlights under the cursor. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. click to select it.

. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. click . the walls remain attached. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. 27 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. under Floor Plans. position the cursor on the wall. you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. click Floor Properties. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. These elevators are wall-hosted components. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. After you add these components. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. and click to place it. and click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. as shown. 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. To do this. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 32 In the Type Selector. move the elevator into position. Next. click 28 On the View toolbar. click Component.20 Click the flip arrows. 24 Click Finish Sketch.

select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. select each one. click Component. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.TIP After adding the elevators. click Modify. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. 37 In the Type Selector. as shown. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model.

When rotating. 40 Select the sink. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. For example. establish the direction of the rotation. when you sketch a wall. when rotating the component. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. click Rotate. The component will rotate to the value. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. the second click specifies the rotation end point. 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. 41 On the Edit menu. In this case. click Modify. The first click specifies the rotation start point. Rotating an object requires two clicks. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. Creating Your First Building Model | 63 .39 On the Design Bar.

select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. as shown. 46 In the Type Selector.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Component. 47 Add the toilet on the right wall. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model.

and click OK. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. 53 In the Filter dialog box. and click Zoom To Fit. 55 On the Edit menu.Before adding the final floor. you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. 56 Select Level 2. and click OK. In addition. right-click. click Modify. elevators. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. doors. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . click Copy to Clipboard. the interior walls. 54 On the Edit menu. click . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and components. 52 On the Options Bar. doors. clear Door Tags. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area.) This captures all the internal walls. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection.

These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. In the steps that follow. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. or ceiling in which you want the opening. 61 On the View toolbar. 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. If you received this error. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. For more information regarding the warning. under Floor Plans. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. 57 In the Project Browser. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. double-click Level 2. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click . you are prompted to select the floor. roof. 58 If you received the conflict message. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. If you know the source of the problem. When you add a model opening. . Therefore. if necessary. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. click 62 On the View toolbar. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3.

70 Using the shape handles.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. click Section. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Adding a section is a two-click process. 68 Click the section line. double-click Level 1. click to set the start point. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. under Floor Plans. and click Zoom To Fit. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. After you add the section. and the second click specifies the section tail. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area. as shown. The first click specifies the section head.

The section head is displayed in blue. floor. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the referenced view opens. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right.71 On the Design Bar. 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head. when it highlights. select it. click Modify. Similarly. 72 Double-click the section head. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and click OK. click Opening. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. or ceiling and cut vertically. select Pick a roof.

click Lines. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . When locked.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. In the following illustration. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below. Notice the locking constraints that display. select the rectangle drawing tool. 78 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes. 79 On the Options Bar. 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. and click Open View.

under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. click Opening. 92 Click Finish Sketch. click Finish Sketch. floor. 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. and click Open View. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select it. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. select Pick a roof. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Floor Plan: Level 2. click Lines. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. 82 On the Design Bar. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. or ceiling and cut vertically. select the rectangle drawing tool. 89 On the Design Bar.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. 83 In the Project Browser. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. double-click Section 1. 90 On the Options Bar.

94 On the Design Bar. After adding a floor to Level 3. and click OK. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. select Floor Plan: Level 2. floor. click . or ceiling and cut vertically. select the rectangle drawing tool. 103 On the View toolbar. when it highlights. you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. under Sections (Building Section). double-click Section 1. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. . 98 Zoom in to the elevators. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. 99 On the Design Bar. click Opening. and click Open View. You have completed the three openings required for this level.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click Lines. click 104 On the View toolbar. 102 Click Finish Sketch. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. select it. 100 On the Options Bar. select Pick a roof.

108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. and click OK. 107 Right-click. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. click Finish Sketch. click . 116 On the Options Bar. Make sure you do not select Floors. double-click Section 1. click Copy to Clipboard. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. and. 119 On the Edit menu. when the chain of walls highlights.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. and click Zoom To Fit. click to select it. 118 On the Edit menu. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 117 In the Filter dialog box. click Floor. under Floor Plans. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. double-click Level 3. 109 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 111 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Building Sections). click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. press TAB.

under Floor Plans. and components to Level 3. under Views (all). doors. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. and click Zoom To Fit. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. click Modify. Do not include the exterior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser.121 On the View toolbar. click . 123 Right-click. double-click Level 2. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner.

click . 129 On the Edit menu. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. 131 On the View toolbar. 128 On the Edit menu. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. 132 On the File menu. 126 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Copy to Clipboard.TIP If you miss a component. click . hold the CTRL key down and select it. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Save. this removes it from the selection set. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 127 In the Filter dialog box. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. Adding a Roof and Ceiling. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name.

5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. clear Defines slope. click Pick Walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear. select Defines slope. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. 3 On the Design Bar. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. m_First_Project-in_progress. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. under Views (all).rvt. click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

. click Roof Properties.Timber for Type. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. 12 On the View toolbar. 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click 13 On the View toolbar.9 On the Design Bar. select Warm Roof . Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. and click OK. click Finish Roof. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click .

The exterior wall chain displays as solid red. select Attach. Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . for Top/Base. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. for Attach Wall. 18 On the Options Bar. The exterior walls attach to the roof.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof. select Top. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge.

28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. you will use the auto ceiling method. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. 25 On the Design Bar. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. 26 On the Edit menu. 29 In the Type Selector. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. ■ In this case. click Undo Move. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. Using the sketch method. This returns the roof to its original position. TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. click Ceiling. click Modify. double-click Level 3. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. under Views (all). 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. under Ceiling Plans.

as shown.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. 32 In the Type Selector. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid. Creating Your First Building Model | 79 .

34 In the Type Selector. Adding Multi-Level Stairs. click Modify. double-click the section head. click the Model Graphics Style control. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. and select Shading with Edges. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and click OK. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. under Constraints. 36 On the Design Bar. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. and from the context menu. 41 On the File menu. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2. click Properties. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. 38 On the View Control Bar. click Save. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 In the drawing area.

5 Add the three lines as shown. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. double-click Level 1.rvt. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 .Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image. select Wide Lines. In the image below. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. 4 In the Type Selector. click Lines. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. In the steps that follow. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). In order to sketch the stairs accurately. m_First_Project-in_progress. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

The dimensions have been predetermined. for example: 550 mm. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . In the steps that follow. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. By default. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. You are in sketch mode. click Stairs.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. and then specify the value. not to the centerline. and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. the Run tool is active. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line.

Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Finish Sketch. select 900mm Pipe. Creating Your First Building Model | 83 .The stair run is complete. click Railings Type. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

This makes the model lines more apparent. 16 On the View Control Bar. 12 Select the stairs. 14 Select the three model lines.Notice that the model lines still display. 15 Delete the three model lines. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click the Hide/Isolate control. click the Hide/Isolate control. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 13 On the View Control Bar. and select Hide Object.

20 In the Element Properties dialog box. Use TAB or zoom in. under Constraints. Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. click . as needed.17 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. 19 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . double-click Section 1. under Sections (Building Section). and click OK. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level.

When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. 26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor.NOTE At this time. SM. as shown. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. 23 On the Edit menu. click Mirror. This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. 24 On the Options Bar. and select Copy. click . 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. Do not select the railings.

It has been modified slightly for training purposes. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. NOTE Beginning with the next exercise.28 On the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . . 31 On the File menu. click Modify. click Close. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. 29 On the View toolbar. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. click Save. click 30 On the File menu.

Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. click Ref Plane. expand 3D Views. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. click the Training Files icon. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Stair railings on Level 3 were added. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Views (all).rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Open. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown. If necessary. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. zoom out before making the selection. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. Additional 3D views were added.

click and verify that Copy is selected. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . 8 On the Options Bar. and select the section line to add it to the selection set.The entire model displays as selected. 7 On the Edit menu. 6 Press and hold CTRL. 5 In the Project Browser. click Mirror. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously.

select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. 20 On the Options Bar. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. 19 In the Type Selector. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. 11 If necessary. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. 13 On the Edit menu. as shown. click Delete. select Roof for Height. under Floor Plans. 12 Select the reference plane.After you specify the mirror axis. click Modify on the Design Bar. click Wall. If necessary. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. 10 After the mirrored copy displays. 14 On the View toolbar. . The new components are numbered sequentially. In addition. click 15 On the View toolbar. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. click .

click . When splitting the wall. click Split Walls and Lines. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . 26 Using the same technique. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. select Delete Inner Segment. 24 On the Options Bar.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. as shown below. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. 23 On the Tools menu.

27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing. 29 On the Tools menu. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. click Split Walls and Lines. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection. 30 On the Options Bar. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . 32 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. to turn off thin lines mode. Arrows refer to each split location. 35 In the Project Browser. enter 150 for Offset. and clear Extend into wall (to core). Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. click . click Floor. under Floor Plans. 38 On the Options Bar.31 Using the technique learned previously. click 34 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 33 On the View toolbar.

44 Select the center of the left vertical line. click and Lock.40 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 51 On the Design Bar. When sketching. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 52 On the Options Bar. dimensions have been added for training purposes. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. . Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser. click the rectangle drawing tool. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. click Trim/Extend. 46 On the Design Bar. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. 43 On the Tools menu. click Lines. In the following illustration. NOTE In the following image. and click OK. click Lines. In this case. 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. click Floor. click Floor Properties. double-click Level 2. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. When finished. 48 Click Finish Sketch. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 41 On the Options Bar. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown.

TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. 58 On the Design Bar. click and . click . use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. 65 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select 1100mm for Type. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . 66 Select the railing. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 56 Click Finish Sketch. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Railing. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box.54 On the Design Bar. and click OK. as shown. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. TIP When sketching. click Railing Properties. 59 On the Options Bar. If they do. click Floor Properties. 61 On the Options Bar. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. click Lines. 63 On the Design Bar. If necessary.

and click to set the mirror axis. 69 Enter SM. 75 In the section view. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. 73 On the Design Bar. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and modify the direction and shape handles. however. click and Copy. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. click Modify. click Mirror. only midpoints will be snapped to. click Section. move the cursor to the right. it is faster to mirror it. For the next mouse click. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. 68 On the Options Bar. as shown. continuous line. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select both railings and the walkway on Level 2.67 On the Edit menu.

77 On the Edit menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. 81 Using the zoom commands. click Copy to Clipboard. and click OK. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. 79 On the View toolbar. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint.76 On the Edit menu. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. 82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If necessary. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. 83 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. double-click Roof. check Defines slope. click . select Level 3.

as shown.85 On the Design Bar. click Lines. clear Defines slope. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 90 On the Design Bar. Exact dimensions are not important. 86 On the Options Bar. 91 On the View toolbar. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Trim/Extend. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. 88 On the Tools menu. click . as shown. click Finish Roof. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier.

93 On the Tools menu.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. you select the edge of the passageway roof. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. The two roofs are joined. and click Hidden Line. First. click the Model Graphics Style control. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. In this case. Second. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . click Join/Unjoin Roof. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. For training purposes. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode.

click Save As. you duplicate the schedule twice. click . 100 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. click Join/Unjoin Roof.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . After creating the schedule. you modify it to filter by level. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. you create and modify a door schedule. 101 On the File menu. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule.96 On the View toolbar. Finally. and click Save. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. 98 On the Tools menu. Scheduling the Building Model. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps.rvt. click the Model Graphics Style control. rename each schedule.

Select Other for Group parameter under. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. enter Hardware for Name. 5 Click Add Parameter. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. Under Parameter Data. and click OK. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. and click Add. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. TIP If the View tab is not visible. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Instance. 7 Click OK. select Doors for category. 4 From the Available Fields list. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. on the Fields tab. select Project parameter. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 .Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Family and Type under Available Fields. 9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. Select Text for Type. Select Common for Discipline.

select Level. select Calculate totals. 26 In the door schedule. 23 Click the Appearance tab. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 25 Click OK.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. The door schedule displays. Therefore. 21 Under Fields. select Family and Type. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 22 Under Field formatting. 14 At the bottom of the tab. and under Field Formatting. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety. select Hidden field. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. 20 Select Right for Alignment. the column is redundant. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 15 Select Mark for Then by. On the schedule. select Cost. 17 Under Fields. 19 Under Fields. 16 Click the Formatting tab. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. 13 Under Sort by. select Header and select Footer. 12 Select Level for Sort by.

A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. under Schedules/Quantities. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. You now have a separate schedule for each level.TIP In this view. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . and click Rename. and click OK. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. right-click Door Schedule. and click Duplicate. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. 33 In the Rename View dialog box. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Click OK. and click Properties. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. click Edit for the Filter value. right-click Door Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. However. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. enter 500. each door is allowed a different value. Cost is a type parameter. and click OK. 32 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. 35 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. under Other. This is because for this door type. enter Brass. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3.

click Settings. double-click each door schedule. 4 Click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. you capture the image and save it within the project. under Schedules/Quantities. Filter each schedule by their respective level. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. Rendering the Building Model. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 41 On the File menu. and then render a 3D view using that scene. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . modify the settings. click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. Enter Exterior Scene for Name.rvt. Under Type. select Exterior. Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. you create an exterior scene. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. After rendering.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. click .

select Good for Quality. select Solid Color. 15 On the View toolbar. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. click OK. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . 6 In the Environment dialog box. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. This is a white background color. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. This is the background color for the scene. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. When the rendering process is complete. click Region Raytrace. and B settings. 10 Click OK. click Environment. 11 In the Environment dialog box. the building model should resemble the following illustration. 7 Click the color bar. under Scene Settings. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. G. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. under Scene Settings. click the Bars tab. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. click . A color bar displays. 14 Click OK. under Background Color.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

click Capture Rendering. expand Renderings. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. click Save. click Display Model.19 On the Design Bar. you add this to a sheet. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. 20 On the Design Bar. Documenting the Building Model. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 23 Proceed to the final exercise. and double-click {3D}. On the second sheet. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. 22 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the next exercise.

2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. The text is not selectable by design. click Load. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click Cancel. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. 9 Click Owner. and press ENTER. enter your name. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. The blue text is text that you can modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. You are prompted to select a titleblock.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. click Metric Library. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Sheet. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component.

and click OK. 14 In the Views dialog box. referring the reader to the view titles. click Project Information. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. the label displays As Indicated. click Add View. If you add views of different scales. In this case. and click Add View to Sheet. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .10 On the Settings menu.

24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view.16 On the Design Bar. click Activate View. Notice the elevation symbols display. and on the context menu. 17 Right-click the view. clear Elevations. 18 On the View menu. However. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. 21 Right-click the view. 20 Under Visibility. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. click Deactivate View. You can work on the building model within this view. 23 Select the view. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 . and click OK. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. and on the context menu.

Notice that the scale value has updated. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area. 28 In the Project Browser.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner. 110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. under Schedules/Quantities.

Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock. adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs.29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. 30 Using the column drag handles.

click Close. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 35 In the Project Browser. 36 On the File menu. 37 On the File menu. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click OK to use the default titleblock. the schedule breaks in half. click Sheet. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. the Scale label displays As Indicated. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. under Elevations (Building Elevations). under Renderings. You have completed your first building model. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Because these two views have different view scales. If you click this. modify the location and width of the view titles. click Save. If necessary. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock.TIP When the schedule is selected. notice the z symbol in the center edge. 34 In the Project Browser.

In the first lesson. In the second lesson. and set it as your default template. you create an office template. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. 113 . you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. you modify the system environment. Finally. which is independent of the project settings.

These settings control the graphics. 6 In the New Project dialog box. 15 Under Notifications. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. click Browse. click Close to close all open projects. and click OK. click Options. 12 Under Colors. 14 Click the General tab. 4 Under Colors. and click OK. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.rte in the Metric folder. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. select yellow. 2 On the Settings menu. and your username when using worksets. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Options dialog box. When an error occurs.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. click OK. click the Graphics tab. click Wall. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. Notice that the drawing area is black. notification preferences. click Training Files. selection default options. 19 On the Design Bar. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click the value for Selection Color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. 11 In the Options dialog box. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. the elements causing the error display using this color. and select the wall. and click Open. 10 On the Settings menu. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 9 In the New Project dialog box. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. 13 In the Color dialog box. select Invert background color. click the Graphics tab. journal cleanup options. 16 Click OK. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. click Modify. 5 On the File menu. under Template file. click Options. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. they are not saved to project or template files. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

Select Red for Selection Color. 27 Open the m_Settings. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. the family template files. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. These files are used primarily in the software support process. 25 On the File menu. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. 32 On the File menu. Under Username. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. as well as the material and rendering libraries. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. Your login name displays by default. If prompted. the family libraries. select your preferred Save Reminder interval. clear Invert background color. click Open. click Close. click No. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Close. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 20 On the Design Bar. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. click Options. 28 On the Settings menu. Under Journal File Cleanup. 29 In the Options dialog box. Specifying File Locations. 31 Click OK.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. 23 On the File menu. 24 When prompted to save. enter the name you want to use during worksharing.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Modify. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). do not save the changes. Modifying System Settings | 115 . click the Training Files icon. you specify your default file locations. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance.

notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. 5 Under Default path for user files. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. click Browse. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. and you can create new libraries. click the File Locations tab. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. choose New  ➤ Project. 8 Click Cancel. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. and click OK. TIP To view a template.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Save. and Import dialog boxes. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. click Browse. and click Browse to select a template. In the following illustration. 7 In the Options dialog box. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. saving. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click . Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. When you are opening. notice the list of library names. 2 In the Options dialog box. 10 Under Libraries. and change the name to My Library. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. 4 Click Cancel. you can start a new project with that template. You can modify the existing library names and path. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. click Options. On the File menu. Load. under Default path for family template files. or loading a Revit Building file. under Libraries. centralized. such as in a large. select the folder to save your files to by default. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. click Browse. 3 Under Default template file. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. This path is set automatically during the installation process. However.

This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. templates. click the My Library icon. or families.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. 16 On the File menu. Load. 21 Under Libraries. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list. 25 Click OK. and click OK. 19 On the Settings menu. 14 Under Library Name. This path is determined during installation. Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. view the current path. specify the new location here. 22 Click to delete the library. Save. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building. 18 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Specifying Spelling Options. select My Library. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. click Open. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. Modifying System Settings | 117 . 20 Click the File Locations tab. and Import dialog boxes. and click OK. click My Library. If you work in a large office. If you want to relocate this path. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. and select it as the library path. click Options.

Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 6 On the File menu. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor. click Exit. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click Options. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 14 Click in the drawing area. enter sheetmtl-Cu. click Edit. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. 20 Under Settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. you modify snap increments. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. and click Open. Modifying Snap Settings. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. work with snapping turned off. 25 On the File menu.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 3 Under Settings. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. If prompted. 9 In the text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Training Files. 12 On the Standard toolbar. click Save. do not save the changes. 19 In the Options dialog box. click OK. 4 Under Personal dictionary. 16 On the Tools menu. click Exit. click Spelling. 21 Under Personal dictionary. 11 In the Options dialog box. click Edit. click the Spelling tab. click Restore Defaults. click Save. click Browse. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. In this exercise. 5 In the New Project dialog box. 2 In the Options dialog box. 7 On the File menu. 22 In the text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 10 On the File menu. you modify snap settings. click OK. click Options. click OK. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. delete sheetmtl-CU. and then click File  ➤ Exit. under Template file. 17 Click OK. scroll down the list of building industry terms. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 24 In the Options dialog box. click Edit. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text. 18 On the Settings menu. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. click Modify. click Close. click the Spelling tab.rte in the Metric folder.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. and enter 500 . For example. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. 8 Under Object Snaps. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.6 On the Settings menu. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. As you zoom in and out within a view. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. zoom out until it does so. 10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. If you do not have a wheel button.. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. Modifying System Settings | 119 . click OK. click Snaps. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. While sketching. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. snapping reverts to the system default settings. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. click Wall. 9 In the Snaps dialog box. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. This is the increment that you added previously.

annotations. 18 Enter SM. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. Finally. and the wall edges. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. fill patterns. click Close. 22 On the Settings menu. Using these options. and delete the value 500 . you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. click Modify. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 23 Under Dimension Snaps. and click Wall. and move the cursor to the right. 25 On the File menu.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. the midpoint. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. If you move the cursor along the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. lines. Modifying Project Settings. it will snap to the endpoints. You create and modify materials. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. 21 Move the cursor downward. and do not save the file. and use it to complete the exercises. and object styles. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. click Snaps. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. save the project file with a unique name.. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Do not set the wall end point. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . the command is only active for one click of the mouse. and specify the wall endpoint. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. Notice that snapping is once again active. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. 24 Click OK. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. When you apply a material to a component.

4 In the New Material dialog box. and select Masonry .rvt located in the Metric folder. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. enter Masonry . and click OK. When a model component is loaded into a project. click Materials. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. In the steps that follow. 3 Click Duplicate. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. you render a region to observe the changes. 2 Scroll down. click the Training Files icon.In the steps that follow. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view.Stone for Name. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu. Masonry-Fieldstone. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box.Fieldstone. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. However. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Open m_Settings. click Open. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor.

click Edit/New.Fieldstone material. 20 Enter the new wall name. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. 28 In the Type Selector. and click OK.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. and click . notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. expand Floor Plans. 24 In the Materials dialog box. click to select a texture. 19 Click Duplicate. Fieldstone on CMU. select Masonry . The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. 21 In the Value field for Structure. 23 On the right side of the Material field. and click OK. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click OK. 14 In the Material Library dialog box. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box.Fieldstone for Name. 27 Press CTRL. 26 Select the right exterior wall. expand Views (all).Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 25 Click OK three times.Fieldstone for the name. click Edit. select user from the list of libraries. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. click This is the material you created previously. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Edit. click OK. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and select Stone82. The AccuRender texture Masonry . Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser.Brick. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . click the Orientation tab. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. enter Masonry . and click OK. . on the Material menu. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1.75 for X and Y. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. 15 Click OK. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. Before closing the Materials dialog box. you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 11 Under Offset. and click OK. 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\. In the next exercise. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. click the Maps tab. and double-click Level 1. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. enter 0.

Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. click . click Region Raytrace. In the exercise. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. Controlling Object Styles. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. right-click the Design Bar. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. the rendering process begins. 31 In the drawing area. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. Zoom into the model. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. Notice the roof did not render. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. 33 On the File menu. When finished. select Region Raytrace. and click Rendering. In the following exercise.29 On the View Toolbar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. click Display Model.rvt. click Save As. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise.

The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. such as steel. and click Open. Drafting pattern density is fixed. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 12 Click OK. 7 Under Custom. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. m_Settings-in progress. click Import. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name.pat from the Common folder. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. choose Model. 10 Under Custom.56 for Import scale. and click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. and enter .rvt.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. expand Elevations. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. 5 Click New. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Custom. select fldstn. click Fill Patterns. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. TIP Typically. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. and double-click East. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 3 Under Pattern Type. your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available.

The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click Edit/New. click in the Material field for layer #1. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . 23 Click OK three times.14 On the Options Bar. For example. click OK. there are often multiple window types within a project.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. 16 In the Value field for Structure. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 27 On the File menu. TIP If the pattern does not display. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . Controlling Object Styles. 26 On the View Toolbar. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. 24 On the Design Bar. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. and click OK.Fieldstone. adjust your zoom settings as needed. In the Materials dialog box. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. click Modify. click .Fieldstone material. click . under Pattern Type. 19 Under Surface Pattern. click Save. select Model. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. click . click Edit. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . click to select a fill pattern. The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. 22 In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box.

expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D Model View. 2 On the keyboard. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you. Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

. 18 On the Design Bar. 4 Select one of the windows. click By Category. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Other. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK.3 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 5 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit/New. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . click the Trim Exterior value. click OK. 12 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Zoom out. under Other. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. . click By Category. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. and select the circular window on the second level. click the Trim Exterior Material value. Modifying Project Settings | 127 . click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. click OK. and click Shading with Edges. click . click Modify.

rvt. 23 On the right side of the Material field. click Object Styles. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type.Granite for name. click Object Styles. 22 Under the Windows category. m_Settings-in progress. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click in the Material field. click OK. 28 On the View Toolbar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. specify Trim . click 29 On the File menu.19 On the Settings menu. expand Windows. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. select Trim . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. and click OK. 26 On the Settings menu. 21 Under Category. 24 In the Materials dialog box. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. expand Windows. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click . . select Trim. 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. 27 Under Category. and click OK twice. click Save. click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above.White for Trim material. Notice that the external window frames are now white.

and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. and click Hidden Line. 2 On the Settings menu. click New. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view.rvt. enter Roof Line for Name. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . click Model Graphics Style. now you must apply it. 11 Click OK. m_Settings-in progress. click Object Styles. click Line Patterns. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 7 On the View Control Bar. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. You have created a new line pattern. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 8 On the Settings menu. is open with the 3D view active. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. under Category. 10 Select Red for Line Color. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. select Roofs.

select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. and click Hidden Line. under Category. select Roofs. click Object Styles.12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. under 3D Views. click Line Styles. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. and select Black for Line Color. click Visibility/Graphics. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 On the View Control Bar. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. 17 Click OK. Select Blue for Line Color. Notice the site topography and the property lines. click New. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. double-click 3D Model View. 18 On the View menu. 24 On the Settings menu. 14 On the Settings menu. double-click Site. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. and select Roofs for Visibility. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. 22 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser.

you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. Enter -3000 mm for Offset. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. double-click Level 1 Annotated. click . click Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . Modifying Annotations In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ Click . Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. Modifying Annotations. and clear Zoning Setback. click Lines. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. (Make sure you specify a negative value. 39 On the Model Categories tab. 41 On the View Toolbar. 30 In the Type Selector. 37 In the Project Browser. Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 38 On the View menu. 33 On the View Toolbar. click Save. click . click Visibility/Graphics. 36 Click OK. and clear Zoning Setback. 40 Click OK.27 For the Zoning Setback category. 42 On the File menu. 31 In the Options Bar. select Zoning Setback. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 28 Click OK. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. Select Red for Line Color. under Floor Plans. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. 35 On the Model Categories tab. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. expand Lines. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view.) Click . 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 On the View menu.

click Dimension. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. In the steps that follow. 18 In the Open dialog box. 4 Enter the name Linear . is open with the 3D View active. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. and select M_Window Tag .rvt. 15 On the Settings menu. notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click Cancel. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser.Imperial dimension available. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows.Number.Imperial and click OK. 5 Under Text. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 12 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1 Annotated. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. scroll down to Windows. click Duplicate. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK twice. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click the default value for Units Format. under Floor Plans. 17 Click Load. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify. click . You have created a new dimension style. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 16 In the Tags dialog box. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Category.rvt.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 2 On the Settings menu. notice that there is a Linear . Select Feet and fractional inches for Units. In the Type Selector. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged.

Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Under Category.In the preview image.Number is now the assigned tag. 30 In the Type Selector. and click OK. 19 Click Open. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value. 28 Under Leader. 31 On the Design Bar.Number as the assigned tag. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. clear Leader. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 32 On the View Toolbar. 29 On the east wall.rvt. 24 On the Options Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . click Tag. Temporary Dimensions. you specify the project units of measurements. dimension values display using this setting. the other displays the instance value. click M_Window Tag . notice that the label displays 1i. In the second section. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. 20 In the Tags dialog box. click Save. Unless overridden. you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . In the first section. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value.Number.Number. 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays.Number. 26 On the Design Bar. select one of the window tags that displays the type value. In the final section. Temporary Dimensions. Specifying Units of Measurement. notice Window Tags appears twice. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. . click the three left-most windows. you modify the detail level assignments. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. verify that Create is clear. 25 On the left side of the north wall. click 33 On the File menu. Leave M_Window Tag . Specifying Units of Measurement. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. you modify the temporary dimension settings. 21 Under Loaded Tags. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. m_Settings-in progress. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. click Modify. 22 Click OK. M_Window Tag . and Detail Level Options. select M_Window Tag .

5 In the Format dialog box. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. 13 On the File menu. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. under Length. 9 Under Doors and Windows. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. click Open. expand Floor Plans. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. click the default value for Format. Unless overridden. expand Views (all). and expand 3D Views. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. 3 In the Format dialog box. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. under Area. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome.rvt from the Common folder. In this table. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. click . click Save. Open c_Project_Browser. Modifying Project Browser Organization. and click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. click Temporary Dimensions. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 6 Click OK. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. dimensions use these project settings. You do not select a view scale to move it. and click OK. click Project Units. click the Training Files icon. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. 14 On the File menu. select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. select meters squared for Unit suffix. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. select Openings. In this exercise. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the default value for Format. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. In this project. click Detail Level. and click OK. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. 12 Click OK. click Close. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. select Faces. 8 Under Walls.

14 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. click Browser Organization. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click Apply. 7 On the Settings menu. 10 In the Project Browser. click Browser Organization.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. expand each view type.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . and click OK. and click OK. select Discipline. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box. 4 On the Settings menu. expand each sheet set. select Type/Discipline. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . On the Project Browser. 8 Select Phase. 6 In the Project Browser. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. click Browser Organization. 13 Select Sheet Prefix.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. In the Project Browser. Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. under Sheets. expand Sheets (all). and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 12 Click the Sheets tab. notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. Modifying Project Settings | 135 .Phase 1-Structure East Wing .

A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. 16 Click the Views tab. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. If you want to save this file. you create an office template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. In this lesson. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. expand 3D Views. and expand both Architectural and Structural. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. and Discipline. When you create new projects.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. 21 In the Project Browser. expand Complete. and click OK. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. Creating an Office Template. View Type (Family and Type). levels. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Views. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. and view names. enter a unique file name. and click OK. You can also save these settings in a template file. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. navigate to your preferred directory. click the Folders tab. dimensions styles. 22 On the File menu. In the lesson that follows. and click New. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. and click OK. and render scenes in a template. Proceed to the next lesson. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. named print settings. click Close. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials.

You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. 12 Under Template File. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. you select the starting point for your office template. click Browse. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. Other templates. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 7 On the View menu. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. expand Elevations. such as the structural template. 8 In the Project Browser. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. and click OK. Whenever you create a new project or template. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. and click Open. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. select Project for Create new. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. for instance. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. click New ➤ Project. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from.rte template. drag a zoom region around the level heads. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. structural or construction. 11 Under Create New. expand Views. you can select it now. close them. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. When you create a new template based on an existing template. select Project Template. 6 In the Project Browser. when you create a new project. click Browse. Modifying Project Settings. click New  ➤ Project. 5 Click OK. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. For example. When you create the material. 9 On the File menu. and double-click North. click Close. 14 Click Open. the same rules apply. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. Creating an Office Template | 137 . click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 13 Select the default template. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. If you have additional projects open.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. For example. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. 10 On the File menu. 3 Under Template File. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. Other than the default template. you modify the project settings for your new template. In that case. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. in the drawing area. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates.

click Materials. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. see the previous lesson. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu.In this exercise. rotate. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Choose the appropriate option. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. If you create or modify new materials. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. and create the AccuRender material. line colors. line patterns. During this exercise. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. weights. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. For more details on modifying these settings. click Object Styles. You can align. 3 Under AccuRender. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. you can set line weights. create and modify them as needed. When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu. click Fill Patterns. In the Object Styles dialog box. specific modifications are not dictated. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. or modify existing patterns. 2 Scroll down the Name list. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. Observe the materials that are already defined. 8 Click OK when finished. and move model patterns.

13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. and click Edit. 33 Click OK. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. and one for annotation symbol line styles. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. create new line subcategories. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. modify the line weight. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. 31 To modify a line pattern. one for perspective model line styles. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. click Line Weights. line color. 19 Click OK. 12 If necessary. In the dialog box. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. 17 For existing line categories. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. select it. 14 Modify categories. You can add and delete view scales. Creating an Office Template | 139 . click Line Patterns. 28 Click OK.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. create new subcategories. such as section lines and dimension lines. 18 If necessary. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. or line pattern as needed. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. click Line Styles. and create new subcategories as needed. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. and scroll through the list of categories.

select it from this list. name the style. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. when you add a door with the tag option selected. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. and dimensions. and choose a decimal symbol. To see the details of a particular style. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 52 Under Length. name the style. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. and click OK. To see the details of a particular style. and specify the properties. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 56 Specify the Slope option. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. and Angle settings. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. tags. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. and radial dimensions are modified separately. and specify the properties. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. click Project Units. For example. click Load. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. 39 Click OK. In the Tags dialog box. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 57 Click OK. click Format. 45 Click OK. click Duplicate. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. 49 To load new annotation tags. select it from this list. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. angular. On the Settings menu. click Duplicate. Volume. 54 Click OK. Linear.

66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. or Fine.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. 63 Review the table. The detail level is based on view scale. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. 64 Click OK. 59 Under Walls. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. click the Views tab. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. or Edit existing organization types. 60 Under Doors and Windows. 68 If necessary. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. click Browser Organization. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click Temporary Dimensions. In a typical project. create new browser organization types. Using the arrows between the columns. Creating an Office Template | 141 . In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Medium. Rename. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. 69 Click the Sheets tab. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu. For example. In such a case. 67 Delete. or Edit existing organization types. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. To move the view scales. Rename. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. click Detail Level. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. However. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. 71 If necessary. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 70 Delete. click the arrows between columns. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 61 Click OK. 72 Click OK. TIP In the drawing area. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. create new browser organization types. Although these settings can be saved within a template. and move view scales as needed. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. When you create a new view.

Use the instructions in the table below to load. 3 To modify. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. In addition. or modify a door. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. select Load. This could be useful for things such as hardware. modify. You can find additional information in Help. and make modifications in each area as necessary. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. notice the list of doors already loaded. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. click Door. If this selection is satisfactory. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. there are some important thoughts to consider.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. If necessary. You can load any family or group into a template. and click Open. phase filters. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. If necessary. the section cut material. create. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. you can move onto the next component type. and the poche depth. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. In the Element Properties dialog box. In the steps that follow. select Edit/New. you do both. Use the table below as a checklist. create. and click OK. you may want to delete. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. Site Settings If necessary. However. do so before starting this exercise. If necessary. you can set up the phases. titleblocks. Although the options are endless. Select it. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. furniture. Obviously. Depending on the intended use of this template. 2 In the Type Selector. you could load detail components. Each command is available on the Settings menu. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. if you loaded every window type you could find. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. or add to this selection. For example. Make modifications. or load a new door type. or use the Project Browser. See Modifying Views and View Templates. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. select from the Options Bar. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. Links to associated tutorials are provided. For example. or electrical fixtures. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Although this is possible. you can set the default contour line interval. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. and electrical fixtures.

5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. click Load from Library. Modify type properties. Click Duplicate. expand Families. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. Creating an Office Template | 143 . select Edit/New. Enter Name. and click OK. 4 Click OK. and select the titleblock type.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Notice that each family category is listed. and click OK. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Press ESC twice to return to the template. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. 6 On the File menu. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded.) 9 Expand the titleblock. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with.

In this exercise. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. To load a titleblock. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. you will first modify view templates. load. Detail Level. At any time. click 11 Click <<Preview. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. and click Delete. create. This titleblock is currently part of the template. you create the views required for your template. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. 12 Click OK. you created new projects using different templates. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. click Load.10 On the Options Bar. RELATED For more information. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In this exercise. Modifying Views and View Templates. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. you can apply a view template to any view. View Range. 2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. To do so. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. click View Templates. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. see Creating a Titleblock Family. . In addition. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. In addition. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Discipline. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. right-click the component. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock.

and elevations. You can also duplicate or delete the view. click Apply View Template. In addition. ceiling plans. 21 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. and then click OK. 6 Click OK. click Apply View Template. and click OK. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. the view is not linked to the template in any way. 12 In the Project Browser. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. Creating an Office Template | 145 . 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. under Floor Plans. 8 On the View menu. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. 18 If you modified any other view templates. you can rename this view according to your preference. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. click Apply View Template. open the view from the Project Browser. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. select Make Plan View. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Notice the level names. select Site Plan. double-click Level 2. After applying the template. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. click Apply. expand Floor Plans. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. or delete this view. duplicate. under Elevations. in the context menu. or delete them as needed. under Floor Plans. If necessary. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. review the floor plans. double-click Site. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. review the existing floor plans. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 4 If necessary. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice that you have the option to rename. double-click South. 20 In the Project Browser. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. under Floor Plans. 16 On the View menu. 23 To add additional levels to the template. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Upon the application of the view template. expand Views. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Rename. 11 Click Apply. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 22 In the Project Browser. and apply the appropriate template. and. click Apply. duplicate. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Black level heads have no associated views. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. 13 On the View menu. 24 In the Options Bar.

41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dynamically Modify View. on the View toolbar. and select Rename. modify settings as needed. select and order required fields. on the View toolbar. click Sheet. You can add schedules to a template. To do so. and click OK.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. 31 Rename the 3D View. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. modify settings as needed. click Schedule/Quantities. 32 To create additional 3D views. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. expand 3D Views. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. go to the View menu. On the Filter tab. On the Appearance tab. to orient and save the view. and click OK. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and modify their properties accordingly. click . You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select one. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box. under 3D Views. You can use this tool. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. 36 To save the view. click 29 In the Project Browser. supply a view name. right-click {3D}. select the category type. 30 In the Project Browser. On the Formatting tab. click 33 On the View toolbar. modify settings as needed. 40 Click OK. If necessary. assign filters. click . The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. and click View Properties.

3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. 9 Specify the date and time. or targa. and click OK. 45 Create new sheets as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. select the titleblock and delete it. exterior-default. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. and click Rename. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. place. You can still add views to the sheet.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. click Environment. ■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. select the default titleblock. 2 Under Type. for example. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. go to the View menu. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. if one exists. it is completely bare. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. Choose from bitmap. settings. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. for example. click Render Scene. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). 3 Click OK. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. and provide a name for the scene. 10 Under Plant Season. Be sure that you have installed this software. Creating an Office Template | 147 . Modifying Render Scene Settings. select the Clouds option. select Exterior. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. click Sun. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. for example. which is included on the Revit Building CD. under Scene Settings. while in winter. 5 Specify the background color. and a Clouds tab appears. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. tiff. 8 Under Scene Settings. After the sheet is created. 7 Click OK. jpeg. if not. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. and colors. To do so. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. and then click OK. the relevant tab appears. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings.

148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. Medium. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. 17 Click OK when finished. Modifying Import/Export Settings. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Better. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. but provides the highest quality. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. Best. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. the quality also is lower. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene.Default. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Good. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Medium. Good. however. and click OK. This works on opaque faces only. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. This is a very time consuming operation but. for example Interior . but also increases the solution time. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Best is the slowest. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. This setting is effective for region raytraces. click New. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. Higher values cause longer rendering times. Best. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. When you import a DWG or DXF file. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Better.

Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. and click Save. 2 For each category. and they become the set mappings for the project. project parameters. Using Shared Parameters. and related multi-category tags and schedules. therefore. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. project parameters. and click Save. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. and so on. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. select Save As. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Creating an Office Template | 149 . you normally schedule a single category: rooms. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. doors. You can save these mappings to a text file. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. 9 Select Save As. name the file. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. For example. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. name the file. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. 5 For each category. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. They cannot be shared with other projects. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. for example. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. 8 In the dialog box. When you import a DWG or DXF file. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. When scheduling. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. Creating Named Print Settings. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired.txt for MicroStation). You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. and so on. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. and click Save. In this exercise. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. windows. When you create a multi-category schedule. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. select Save As.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. These settings are retained within the project template. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters).

you can load them into the template. For each parameter group. 5 Enter the group name. click Shared Parameters. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select a group that you want to add parameters to. 23 To add a shared project parameter. 31 Navigate to the directory. 7 Under Parameter group. 22 Add project parameters as needed. 2 Click Create. you may want to save the file to a network location. click New. For information on creating multi-category tags. 21 Click OK. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. select the tag. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. select a parameter discipline type. The tag is now part of the template. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. 11 For each parameter group. select a parameter value type. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. and specify the Type. click New. 14 Click Add. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. and click OK. 3 Name and save the file. click Add. and choose a shared parameter. After the file is named. you can begin creating parameter groups. add required parameters. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. or use the Help documentation for assistance. under Groups. If a file already exists. 8 Under Parameters. 18 Under Type. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Project Parameters. 16 Under Name. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 9 Name the Parameter. you can create a list of parameters. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 24 Click Select. select Project parameter. 27 Click OK. 30 On the File menu. and select Shared Parameter. and click Open. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. 25 Click OK. enter a parameter name. 17 Under Discipline. and click OK when finished. 10 Click OK. This allows you to name the external parameter file.

click Print. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and print. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and create new settings for this printer. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. Your template is complete. and make it your default template file. By going first to the Print command. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. 9 In the Print dialog box. Creating Named Print Settings. you create named print settings. you can set options such as sheet sizes. 6 Modify the printer settings. and click OK. Creating an Office Template | 151 . Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. click Save. paper placement. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click OK. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. click Schedule/Quantities. 2 Under Name. If you need to share this file with others. and create additional settings as needed. For each printer. 34 Under Name. you should save it to a network path. select Template Files (*. 5 In the New dialog box. Depending on your office environment. and click Save. save the file as a template. 11 Click OK when finished. make minor modifications if necessary. 15 Name the template. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. Save the template 12 On the File menu.rte). enter a name for the schedule. click New. click Setup. you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. and the percent of actual size. 4 Click Save As. you need only select a setting. The only remaining task is to save it. 3 Under Settings. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. select a different printer. 36 When you have completed the schedule. By creating named settings within the template. 14 Under Save as type. click Setup. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

click Browse. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 23 Navigate to the template location. you modified settings. 19 Click OK. click Options. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. loaded components. 24 Click OK. 17 Select Browse. you ensure that office standards are maintained.Use the template 16 To use the template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. go to the File menu. and click Open. and saved them to a template. By investing the time to individualize your template. If you have a project. You can also set this template as your default template. and click Open. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 22 Next to Default template file. and click New  ➤ Project. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. In addition. In this lesson. In addition. This can provide a good starting point for a template. select it. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. 18 Select the template.

153 . and how to create a compound ceiling. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. For more information. You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. see the online Help.

The ceiling is displayed. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. Open c_Ceiling.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. You add four different types of ceilings. After you add ceilings to the model. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. click Ceiling. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click Level 1. when the room boundary highlights. select it. 3 In the Type Selector. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. expand Ceiling Plans. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise. 4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and.

under Name. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . under Materials and Finishes. it displays in the Type Selector. click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.5 Select the lower center room and. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left.Interior . select Finishes . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right. When selected. select it. 10 On the Options Bar. click . when the room boundary highlights. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. 13 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. 15 In the Materials dialog box. click in the Material type parameter Value field. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. Creating Ceilings | 155 . click Modify.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. click Duplicate.

you learn how to create a compound ceiling. Open c_Condominium. add layers of material to the ceiling type.18 If you want to save your changes. expand Views (all). and then add the ceiling to the building model. click Open. The original project units are imperial. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets.rvt located in the Common folder. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you change the project to Metric. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. You create a new ceiling type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In the steps that follow. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click First Floor. click Save As. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. expand Ceiling Plans. on the File menu.

under Layers. under Construction. 7 In the Type Selector. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Name dialog box. click the format button for length. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. 8 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Format dialog box. under Thickness. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. under Material. click Insert twice to add two new layers. click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Metal . enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. click OK. click . click Preview to display the current layers.Interior . Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. enter Gypsum board on metal furring.Gypsum Wall Board. and click OK. click OK. and click OK. select Finishes . Creating Ceilings | 157 . under Material. click Project Units. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value.Cold Rolled Channel. under Thickness. click Ceiling. specify Millimeters for units. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Thickness.Furring. click Edit/New. under Material. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu.

and double-click Section 1. click Save As. 22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. and click Fine. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. 21 On the View Control Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . click the Detail Level control.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all). expand Sections (Type 1). and save the exercise file with a unique name. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 23 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu.

When creating a hosted opening. or ceiling. In addition. or ceiling. floor. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. In the exercises that follow. or ceilings using the Opening command. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. floors. You can cut vertically through a selected floor. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. 159 . roof.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs.

the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. notice the existing dormer. click Open. In this case. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. the project must have an existing dormer. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings.rvt located in the Metric folder.

expand Floor Plans. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. click to select it. click Opening. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. and double-click Roof . and click OK. and double-click Attic View. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. Select the main roof to be cut. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. 3 In the Project Browser.Dormer. The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. expand Views (all). WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. and.2 In the Project Browser. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. under Views (all). and click Modelling. NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. This is an interior 3D view. expand 3D Views. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. when the edges of the roof highlight. right-click the Design Bar.

162 | Chapter 5 Openings . 8 Zoom in around the dormer. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. and.Next. a bottom face of a floor. when it highlights. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. a side face of a wall. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. select it. an edge of the roof to be cut.

12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Boundary. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. and notice the drag controls on each end.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. Although the overlapping lines are not a problem. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Attic View. under 3D Views. 14 In the Project Browser. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 .

15 On the File menu. click Open. 2 Using the spin function.rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings . select Save As from the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. NOTE If you want to save this file. click Close. click . click the Training Files icon. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar.

the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. floor. and click Modelling. 7 On the Options Bar. In the following illustration. when it highlights. right-click the Design Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. and. and click OK. click .3 On the Design Bar. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. The opening on the right is cut vertically. click Modify. click Opening. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. 8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. select it. select Pick a face of a roof.

10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. select it. click Finish Sketch.9 On the Design Bar. 166 | Chapter 5 Openings . when it highlights. and.

click . Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. select Save As from the File menu. click Close. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. . you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof.rvt located in the Metric folder. dimension it. NOTE If you want to save this file. click the Training Files icon. 11 On the Options Bar. You can move it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. click 12 On the File menu. change the shape. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. notice the tool displays. and click Finish Sketch. click Open.The opening is an element independent of the roof. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . and constrain it like any other element. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. 2 Using the spin function.

right-click the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. and click Modelling. floor. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Modify. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. when it highlights. 6 Click OK. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . In the following illustration. or ceiling and cut vertically. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof. and. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. select it.3 On the Design Bar. click Opening.

and double-click Roof . 9 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. when it highlights. click Lines. click . 12 On the Design Bar. select it. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . expand Views (all).Because the cut is vertical. and. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. 13 On the View Toolbar.Dormer. 8 In the Project Browser. click . expand Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch.

The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. change the shape. In this exercise. You can move it. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch.rvt located in the Metric folder. . and constrain it like any other element. expand Views (all). you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . expand Sections (Filled Arrow). Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. click 16 On the File menu. click Close. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. and double-click Section 1. dimension it. and click Finish Sketch. NOTE If you want to save this file. you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Save As from the File menu. notice the tool. 15 On the Options Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.The opening is an element independent of the roof. click Open.

Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. floor. or ceiling and cut vertically. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Modelling. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. The first click specifies the start point. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. Before cutting the floor opening. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. and click OK. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. select Pick a roof. click Opening. click Ref Plane. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. and the level 1 and 2 lines. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. In the following illustration. right-click the Design Bar. However.

Otherwise. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. and click Wireframe. and click Open View.6 Select the floor on Level 2. do so now. click Lines. Notice the new floor opening. click . 9 On the Design Bar. If you intend to complete the next exercise. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . the stairs. 8 On the View Control bar. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 10 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 13 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. and the reference plane you added previously. select Floor Plan: Level 2. you may close the project with or without saving it. click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Filled Arrow). You are prompted to select a view. double-click Section 1. 7 In the Go To View dialog box.

select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. Use the following illustration as a guide. under 3D Views.Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click OK. click Opening. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. select Pick a roof. 8 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . 7 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow). Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. Cut a ceiling opening. 5 On the Options Bar. double-click Section 1. under Views (all). under Views (all). and click Modelling. floor. click . 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Interior View. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. and click Open View. click Finish Sketch. the interior face of the wall. or ceiling and cut vertically. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. right-click the Design Bar. Notice the new ceiling opening. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane.

select Save As from the File menu. The first click specifies the start point. you must sketch in a plan view. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. expand Views (all). Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . Before cutting the opening. however. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. click Ref Plane. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and the level 1 and 2 lines. click Close. click the Training Files icon.10 On the File menu. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. and double-click Section 1. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. NOTE If you want to save this file. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. However.

select Floor Plan: Level 2. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Properties. select Create shaft opening. click . and click Modelling. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. the stairs. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. and click Open View. under Sections (Filled Arrow). under Views (all).4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. right-click the Design Bar. click Opening. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. 8 On the Design Bar. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. and the reference plane you added previously. 7 On the View Control bar. double-click Section 1. and click Wireframe. 12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Enter 3400 for Base Offset. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. click Model Graphics Style. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Project Browser. but does cut the ceiling of level 1. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located.

ceiling. Using the shaft tool. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings . you can cut a single opening through every floor. and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels.

and panels. you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails.Railings 6 In this tutorial. 177 . posts. balusters.

navigate to Metric Library/Balusters.rfa. click New ➤ Project. M_Baluster . 7 On the Options Bar.rfa .rfa. select Chain. Project is selected under Create new. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. 4 In the Open dialog box. verify that DefaultMetric.rfa. press the CTRL key.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder. Before you lay out the railing.Custom4. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template. 3 On the File menu.Square w Ball. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. and click Open. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown. click Lines. such as panels. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. M_Baluster Panel 1. click Railing.Creating Railings In this lesson. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails.rfa. M_Post . between the balusters. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise. you create a railing and add components to it. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.Newel.Custom3. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . 6 On the Design Bar. select M_Baluster . and M_Post .

Dark Gray. 19 In the Materials dialog box. 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. In row 2. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. select Metal . select Metal .Dark Gray. and click OK. click in the Material field. and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. click Edit for Rail Structure. click Edit/New. In row 2.Paint Finish . . Matte for Name. 16 In row 1. In row 2. 13 In the Name dialog box. in row 2. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Insert.Paint Finish . click in the Material field. click Railing Properties. 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box. In row 2. enter -25 mm for Offset. click Duplicate. Creating Railings | 179 . enter Bottom for Name. Matte for Name. and then click . and click OK. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. enter Top for Name. enter 300 mm for Height. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree.

select M_Post . click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. click on row 2.rvt. 24 In row 3. 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . click . click OK. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. 32 On the Toolbar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . Enter 380 mm for Dist. click Shading with Edges. under Construction. enter 230 mm for Dist. from previous. A new row is displayed. click Finish Sketch. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. select M_Post. Select Bottom for Base. 30 Click OK three times. 23 In row 2. Adjusting Railing Parameters. 34 On the File menu.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 33 On the View menu. from previous.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. and then click Duplicate. Select Bottom for Base. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. from previous. under Main pattern. under Posts.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . 31 On the Design Bar. in row 1. 28 In row 2. Enter 380 mm for Dist.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. 29 In row 3.Glass for Baluster Family. 25 In row 4. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. select M_Post.

17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify and select the railing. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Main pattern. click Edit/New. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. under Construction. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Center for Justify. expand Views (all). 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. and double-click East. 13 Click OK three times. Creating Railings | 181 . The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option. Training_Railing. under Construction. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click . 8 Click OK three times.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. select End for Justify. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 18 Click OK three times. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Main pattern. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. under Main pattern. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. under Construction. click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit/New. click .

32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. under Construction. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. click . View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. click . You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. under Main pattern. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. under Main pattern. 34 Click OK three times. click .The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. under Main pattern. 23 Click OK three times. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . click Edit for Baluster Placement. custom baluster excess length fill. click Edit/New. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster .Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. 28 Click OK three times. under Construction. View post options 29 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. and spacing options. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 35 On the Toolbar. under Construction. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click . Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. 33 Under Posts. click Edit for Baluster Placement. enter 54 degrees for Angle. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. select Beginning for Justify.

enter 0 mm for Dist. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Construction. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. from previous. click Modify and select the railing. under Main pattern. from previous. The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. Creating Railings | 183 . a corner post does not occur. In row 4. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. under Elevations. 42 Click OK three times. 43 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. click . 41 Under Posts. 44 On the File menu. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 380 mm for Dist. click Edit/New. double-click East.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

you learn how to add fascia. In addition. gutters.Roofs 7 In this tutorial. 185 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building. and soffits to the roofs that you create.

Creating Roofs In this lesson. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. 5 In the Go To View dialog box. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Floor Plans. including hip. select Name. you learn to create several different types of roofs. 4 Click OK. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. shed. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. You do not need to create the work plane. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. expand Views (all). a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. and double-click Level 1. 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. gable. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. Open m_Roofs. click Open. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and mansard roofs. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. Creating Roofs | 187 . TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. click Lines. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the roof profile.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. select Chain. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.

The roof should resemble the following illustration. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Creating Roofs | 189 . press TAB. Next. expand Views (all). press CTRL. click Modify. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. 21 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Tools toolbar. and select the second wall. 18 Select the edge of the roof. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. click to display the model. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Section 1. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. click . and then select the exterior face of the wall.16 On the View toolbar. expand Sections (Type 1).

26 On the View toolbar. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.24 On the Options Bar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.

1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 12 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. sketch the roof footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. and click Open View. under Dimensions. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. By default. m_Roofs. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. 7 On the Options Bar. 10 Press CTRL. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. select both slope definition lines. 3 Next. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Walls. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. Next. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Modify. and click OK. Creating Roofs | 191 . Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall.rvt. click . verify that Defines slope is selected. clear Defines slope.

NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. and double-click Level 3. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. expand Views (all).rvt. click Pick Walls. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. m_Roofs. clear Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang.14 On the View toolbar. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. When you complete the roof. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. 3 On the Options Bar.

click . 9 Using automatic snaps. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. sketch the chimney opening. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. 15 On the Options bar. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 Click to select all the walls. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Lines. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 8 On the Options Bar. 10 On the View menu. Creating Roofs | 193 . 17 When you see the informational dialog box. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. click Modify. select Defines Slope.

click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. expand Views (all). click to view the new roof in the model. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. select Defines slope. and enter 600 for Overhang. 1 In the Project Browser.18 On the View toolbar. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. and double-click Level 2. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. m_Roofs. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. 11 To trim the first line segment. Creating Roofs | 195 . close the roof sketch. click . trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click Lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 9 On the Tools toolbar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. Next.Next. and click . clear Defines Slope. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. select the left vertical slope definition line. 10 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. using the following illustration for guidance. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building.

click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 18 On the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. click Roof Properties. 14 Under Constraints. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click 17 Click to display the model. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.Next. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

clear Defines Slope. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. click Pick Walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating Roofs | 197 .23 On the Tools toolbar. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Roofs. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. and double-click Level 2. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs.rvt.

click Modify. 16 Under Constraints. Next. 6 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. press TAB. 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. Next. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Roof Properties. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. select the left vertical roof line. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. you add a slope-defining line. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. 10 To trim the first line segment. 9 On the Options Bar. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. and press ENTER. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. enter 0 for Overhang. click .

and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 199 . and enter 600 for Offset. 5 On the View menu. and double-click 3D. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 1 In the Project Browser. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click . click to activate the roof footprint sketch. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand 3D Views. click Split Walls and Lines. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. click Ref Plane. m_Roofs. and double-click Level 2. 4 In the Project Browser. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 On the Tools menu. expand Views (all). you need to add two reference planes. expand Views (all). Before you can add slope arrows. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split.rvt.

click Modify. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 14 On the Options Bar. 20 Under Dimensions. click Modify. select Slope for Specify.Next. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. . 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. add two new slope arrows. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . click Slope Arrow. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. and click 19 Under Constraints. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. and then click OK. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head.15 to add the second slope arrow. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. clear Defines Slope. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. select both slope arrows. Aligning Roof Eaves. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Next. enter 500 for Rise/1000. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. verify is selected. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Press CTRL. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

under Dimensions. Creating Roofs | 201 . 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). select a method to align the eaves. When aligning eaves. expand Floor Plans. When you sketch a hip roof. on the Options Bar. When eave heights differ. and click OK. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage.rvt. click . 5 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. click . click to display the model. and double-click Garage Roof. 3 On the Options Bar. The eave lines display with a dimension. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 10 On the Options Bar. click Align Eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 13 On the View toolbar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. Next. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 On the Design Bar. m_Roofs. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. the adjacent eave heights must align. click Finish Roof.

Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. click . click Open. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.14 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. Open m_Mansard_Roof. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click North. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. expand Elevations. expand Views (all). 3 Select the roof and. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Save As. 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. under Constraints.rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. Creating a Mansard Roof. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Modify. click the Training Files icon.

click . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 3. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. Creating Roofs | 203 . click to display the model. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. and then select Defines slope. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 17 On the View toolbar. 10 On the Options Bar. click Lines. 7 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. under Dimensions.6 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and select the remaining three lines. click Finish Roof. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all).

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can easily create its fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. click Open. 1 On the File menu. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. on the File menu. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. and soffits in Revit Building. open the Profiles folder. click .rfa. under Construction. and open the Roofs folder. and click OK. Gutters. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 8 In the Name dialog box. gutters. open the Metric Library folder. Open c_Condominium.18 If you want to save your changes. After you create a roof. and click OK twice. and save the exercise file with a unique name. enter Built-up Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 Press CTRL. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. and Soffits In this lesson. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. gutters. 2 In the Open dialog box. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Save As.rvt located in the Common folder. and soffits. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . click the Training Files icon. Creating Fascia. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.

you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Fascia. Creating Gutters In this exercise. and Soffits | 205 . 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters. Gutters. 13 Proceed to the next exercise.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia.

Creating Soffits In this exercise. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. you learn how to place a roof soffit. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 2 On the Options Bar. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 10 Click to place the gutter. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. click . Creating Soffits. and click OK three times. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 12 Proceed to the next exercise.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Duplicate. 3 In the Properties dialog box. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.rvt. and click OK. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click in the Value field for Material. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. and then click . select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. under Construction. 8 In the Materials dialog box. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. c_Condominium. click Edit/New.

rvt. Creating Fascia. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Views. expand Views (all). c_Condominium. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. Gutters. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. click Pick Roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand 3D Views. 4 Select the roof. and Soffits | 207 .

10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 8 Select the roof. and then select the soffit to join them. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Join Geometry.7 On the Tools menu. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

Stairs 8 In this tutorial. and semi-circular runs of stairs. and work with a stair calculator. add railings to your landings. 209 . You learn to create special feature stairs. u-shaped. you learn how to create and modify straight.

and then modify. click Open. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. specify the start point for the stair run. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. under Graphics. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. such as treads. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. 2 On the View menu. add.rvt file located in the Metric folder. and double-click Level 1. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Creating Stairs In this lesson. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. click View Properties. risers and stringers. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. You learn to work with different stair components. click Stairs. select Level 2 for Underlay. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Floor Plans. 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model. railings from another project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Click OK. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser.

click Finish Sketch. 9 On the Design Bar.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. Creating Stairs | 211 .

12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown. click . 13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 11 On the Toolbar. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

measured from the exterior wall centerline. Dark Gray Matte for Name. and then click Stairs Properties. 17 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK.Paint Finish. select Metal . 16 Under Materials and Finishes. 10 In the Name dialog box. select for Tread Material Value. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. select for Riser Material Value.Paint Finish. under Treads.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click OK three times. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Exit Stairs for Name. enter 915 mm for Width. 8 Under Dimensions. click Duplicate. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box.The new reference plane. Dark Gray Matte for Name. and then click Edit/New. select Finishes . Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. select for Stringer Material Value. 15 In the Materials dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. is at 864. click Stairs. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. 13 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. select Metal . and click OK. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 12 Under Materials and Finishes.

21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. Creating Stairs | 233 . The exit stair run layout is complete. 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown.

and double-click Exit Stairs. and the exit door. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. click Finish Sketch.23 On the Design Bar. 234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser.

hold down CTRL. and select both railings. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. click Edit/New. under Construction. select M_Baluster . Creating Stairs | 235 . The selected objects are hidden. 31 On the Options Bar.27 On the View Control Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box.Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. in row 2. 35 Click OK three times. click Modify. under Posts. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. and the exit stairs are visible. 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. click .

under Constraints. click Save. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 40 On the File menu.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . and select the exit stairs. click Modify. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing. click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. and click OK. Under Risers. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. click Stairs. 11 In the Materials dialog box. expand Floor Plans. select Monolithic Stairs. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. select Concrete . Under Construction. select for Monolithic Material Value. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. Under Stringers. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. Training_Stairs.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. and then click Stairs Properties. and click Edit/New. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. Under Stringers. click Duplicate. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Under Risers. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. click . select 9 In the Materials dialog box. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. enter 1300 mm for Width. click Run. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Risers. Creating Stairs | 237 . select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. expand Views (all). enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height.rvt. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. for Tread Material Value. and double-click Level 1. select Concrete .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. Under Treads. 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building. and click OK. Under Treads. 6 In the name dialog box. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. 15 On the Options Bar.

The semi-circular stair run is complete. as shown. and click to specify the arc end point. and press ENTER. 18 On the keyboard. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs .17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. enter 1310 for Radius as shown.

expand Views (all). Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. and double-click Exterior Stairs. TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. click Finish Sketch. Creating Stairs | 239 .20 On the Design Bar.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Select row 2. select Wood .5 On the Options Bar. under Name. . 12 Select row 3. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . and click Down twice. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. and click Up. click . and select Finish 1 [4]. and in the Materials dialog box. ■ 15 In row 5. Enter 15 mm for Thickness. under Layers.Interior . Click in the Material field. click Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field.EIFS . under Name. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Click OK. click Insert twice. ■ 14 In row 3. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. click . click Edit for Structure.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. click Edit/New. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. under Name. click . and select Finish 2 [5].Exterior .Stud Layer. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Finishes . Click OK. Click in the Material field. select Finishes . 13 In row 1. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. and in the Materials dialog box. 8 In the Name dialog box. Enter 50 mm for Thickness. Click in the Material field.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). and select Structure [1]. click Duplicate. and in the Materials dialog box.

select Wall centerlines for Prefer. and click Select All Instances. right-click. expand Walls. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. 22 In the Type Selector. 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. 25 On the Options Bar. and expand Basic Wall. 24 On the Design Bar. Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. expand Families.200mm. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . 17 Click OK three times. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. 21 Select Generic . 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. click Dimension.16 Click Preview. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model.

30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays. Creating Walls | 261 . select Wall faces for Prefer. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point.

31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls . 34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. select Faces of core for Prefer.

35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 263 . The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays.

25 for Import scale. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box. 41 In the Import dialog box. 47 In the Materials dialog box. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. and click Open. click OK. and click Import. 50 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Interior . navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. and double-click Callout of Section 3.Glass Reinforced Gypsum. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand . expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 45 In the Materials dialog box. 43 Click OK twice. 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section. and under Cut Pattern. select Finishes . and click OK.Dense for Import. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. click for Pattern. click Fill Patterns. expand Sections (Callout 1). 264 | Chapter 9 Walls .GRG . select revit. Enter Gypsum for Name. Enter 0. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Settings menu. select Gypsum. click Materials.pat. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. select Custom. click New. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser.

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . 5 Select the south wall. and double-click South. expand Views (all). and select Top for Attach Wall. 6 On the Options Bar.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. click Attach for Top/Base. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. expand Elevations.

8 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. and select Top for Attach Wall. 9 Select the north wall. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. under Elevations. 10 On the Options Bar. Creating Walls | 285 . double-click North. click Attach for Top/Base.

expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}.12 In the Project Browser. This also completes the Walls lesson. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls . This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise.

Like walls. you need to select a panel. panel. 287 . They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. to resize the system. you need to change the length of the wall. you select the grid. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. To switch panel types. and mullions. and they are not windows. and you can change these elements individually. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. To change grids. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. For example. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines. This affects the entire curtain system. or you can use a specific curtain system command.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. Like windows. Unlike windows.

expand Views (all). you create a curtain system using the wall command. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.rvt file located in the Metric folder.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Ground Floor. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Wall. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 On the Type Selector. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. click Open. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. expand Floor Plans. 5 Start the curtain system where shown.

7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. Flat Curtain System | 289 .

and room bounding. 12 Under Constraints. 11 Select the curtain system and click . expand 3D Views. and click OK.8 In the Project Browser. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. expand Views (all). You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. 9 On the View menu. 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. and double-click Southeast Isometric. top constraint. click Orient ➤ Northeast. top and base attachments.

Right now. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . the curtain system is a single glazed panel. under Floor Plans. 22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. click Curtain Grid. using curtain grids. click Elevation. and click Rename. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. and click OK. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. Flat Curtain System | 291 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 20 In the drawing area. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view.a. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser.

29 In the Select Levels dialog box. and SEVENTH FLOOR. click Modify. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 27 On the Edit menu. THIRD FLOOR. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. FOURTH FLOOR. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. SIXTH FLOOR. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. click Copy to Clipboard. 25 On the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. and click OK. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. Click to create a vertical grid. Click to place another grid line. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. one larger than the other. click Curtain Grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. FIFTH FLOOR. 28 On the Edit menu. 33 On the Design Bar.

You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Flat Curtain System | 293 . Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. Instead. click Add or Remove Segments. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and then select the segment above it. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step.Next. and on the Options Bar. The segment line style changes to dashed. The two segments are removed. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You do not use the Door command. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 38 Using the same method. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor.

39 On the Design Bar. 40 On the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. select One Segment. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. and lock them. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 43 Delete the dimensions. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. Use the following picture as a guide. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click Curtain Grid. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels.

These panels schedule as doors. click Modify. on the new curtain system you added. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). You will have to press TAB to highlight it. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones.rfa. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. double-click Entrance Elevation. 52 On the Type Selector. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 57 On the View Control Bar. not as curtain panels. This changes the graphics style of the view. Flat Curtain System | 295 . 56 In the Project Browser. They are part of the curtain panel category. Now. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. Next. 50 In the Doors folder. under Floor Plans. click in any white space to exit the editor. and click Open. under Elevations. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Next. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. click . you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. The panel changes to a double door. and click Wireframe. 55 In the Project Browser. 49 On the File menu. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 54 On the Design Bar.

and Material specifies the shading and patterning. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.rvt. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. The glazed panels display in blue. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. click System Panel : Solid. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 61 With the panel still selected. 65 On the View Control Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 66 On the View Control Bar.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. and the solid panels display in white. 60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. click Save As. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. click Wireframe for Graphics Style. click . 68 On the File menu.

select All Empty Segments. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 6 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. there are a few that you do not want. 9 Delete the mullions below them.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. 2 On the Options Bar. so you remove them next. Flat Curtain System | 297 . however. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. You are going to change some mullion joins. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.

The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. 13 Click the top mullion control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. Two mullion join controls display.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors.

6 Under Constraints. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 16 Save the file. Finally. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Floor. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Wall.TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you add a curtain system using the wall command. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. 15 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Type Selector. Finally. click Modify. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 5 Click . 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. Curved Curtain System | 299 . 14 On the Design Bar. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. click . This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. and click OK. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels.

Next. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. eighths.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. you place grids on the system. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. click Curtain Grid. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 15 In the Project Browser. and then sixteenths. Divide the halves into quarters. double-click East. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed.

click Basic Wall: Generic . Curved Curtain System | 301 . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. 19 On the Type Selector. you change some panels in the system.300mm.17 On the Design Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Next. click Modify. select the bottom layer of panels. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file.

11 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. double-click Exterior. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. click Lines. click Finish Sketch. specify Glass for Subcategory. 10 Under Identity Data. 8 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Metric templates folder. enter 100 for Depth. and on the Options Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. and click . 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . . click .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 1 On the File menu. click New ➤ Family. click Model Lines.rft.

and save the family as Curtain Panel .Pattern. and click Flip Orientation. under Floor Plans. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 16 On the File menu. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 14 On the File menu.rfa family. 23 On the View toolbar. 20 On the Type Selector. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. click Save As. 26 On the Type Selector. select Curtain Panel . Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. All the panels change to the solid panel. 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. All fifth floor panels are selected. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. click curved curtain system. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser. and then click . under Floor Plans.Pattern.Solid. 24 In the Project Browser. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . All fourth floor panels are selected. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. and return to your project file. click Modify.rfa. Curved Curtain System | 303 . click System Panel .Pattern.13 On the Design Bar. 22 Right-click. .

This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. enter 8 for Sides. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rft. and click OK. 27 Save the file. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. 9 On the Options Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. click Mullion. For vertical mullions. click New ➤ Family. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Metric Profile. click . under Elevations. double-click East. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 6 On the Settings menu.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. click Lines. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. click Family Category and Parameters. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius.

rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. Curved Curtain System | 305 . 15 On the File menu. 18 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 11 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Detail Component. click Visibility.detail. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. clear Fine. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. 13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Click again to specify the ending point. click the Training Files icon. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location.

29 Click . 30 On the Modelling tab. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. 37 Click OK twice.rfa family. it can be added as a mullion type. and click Visibility. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 21 Select the detail component. After the new profile is loaded.rfa. and click OK. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. click Modify to exit placing mullions. You have placed more mullions than you want. so next you remove the unwanted ones. and click OK. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. click Modify. 36 Under Construction. select Circular Mullion for Family. and return to the project file. clear Coarse and Medium. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. click Save As. 31 Click . double-click Southeast Isometric. 23 On the File menu. 41 In the Project Browser. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu. 28 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans. click Duplicate. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. 40 On the Design Bar. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR. 38 On the Options Bar. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Mullion. and click DELETE. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 26 On the File menu. under 3D Views. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 33 Click Edit/New. select All Empty Segments.20 On the Design Bar.

as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. a storefront system. and press TAB. All the inside faces highlight. and then apply those custom elements to the system. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. make custom curtain panels and mullions. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. In this lesson. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and you can click to select them all. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. you learned to create a curved curtain system. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and a ruled curtain system.43 Save the file. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. click Pick Walls. 5 On the Options Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls.

and click OK. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Project Browser. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. select Entire Grid Line. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Roof Properties. 18 On the View Control Bar. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. 10 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. Storefront System In this exercise. click Mullion. click Finish Roof. 19 Save the file. 17 On the Design Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.7 On the Design Bar. 9 Under Constraints.

click Wall. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . 4 On the Type Selector. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. This curtain wall cuts the original wall. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and enter 2400.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. double-click GROUND FLOOR. select Unconnected for Height. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

even if the wall height changes. enter 10200 mm. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. 12 Select the storefront wall. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. 9 On the Design Bar. see the Revit Building help. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. which is specified in the type. To see how the grid layout is defined. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. and Offset (Grid 1). under 3D Views. This specifies an exact length for the wall. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. center. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. and press ENTER. For this wall. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. or end. double-click Southeast Isometric. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. Click OK. and click . click Modify. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. Under the Pattern heading.8 Click the temporary dimension. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. Justification (Grid 1). 10 In the Project Browser. The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. you find Number (Grid 1). Angle (Grid 1). enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters.

16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. click Mullion. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . double-click Southeast Isometric. 18 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. 17 Select a curtain grid. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. under 3D Views. In this exercise. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style.

6 Click the highlighted line. and highlight the thin line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. A panel between the 2 lines is created.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR. 8 Select the highlighted line.

Additional Curtain Systems | 313 . quarters. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 15 On the Type Selector.A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. Finally. and click . you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. click System Panel : Solid. 9 Select the panel. 17 Save the file. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. embed a curtain system inside another wall. quarters. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and then eighths. click Curtain Grid. and then eighths. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. Next. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and define a ruled curtain system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

begin by first creating sheets. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. 315 .Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project. elevation. which are a type of view in a project. section. and are accessible from the Project Browser. usually contain a title block. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. and schedules. The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. three-dimensional views. Sheets are defined by borders.

adjust the view scale. click the Training Files icon. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. how to create new views from a building model. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. Next. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. how to add views to the sheets. You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet.

click Project Information. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. lighting fixtures. Casework. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. right-click Level 1. Casework. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. 5 In the Project Browser. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 9 Under Visibility.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. expand Views (all). furniture. and click Rename. Turn off visibility for casework. enter Level 1 Furniture. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. furniture. click the Model Categories tab. click Edit for Project Address. and click OK. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and expand Floor Plans. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. furniture. and click Duplicate. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. 2 Under Floor Plans. click Visibility/Graphics. A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser.

click Sheet. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. 2005 for Project Issue Date. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. right-click. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click View. MA 12345 14 Click OK. Enter Client Approved for Project Status. Enter Residence for Project Name. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. 16 Click OK. select A0 metric. Smith for Client Name. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. Enter J. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK.

click . under Identity Data. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK.Unnamed. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. 25 In the Views dialog box. expand Sheets (all). 21 When the title block highlights. on the Options Bar. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. click Add View. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 .NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. 20 On the Design Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 19 In the Project Browser. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. View scale is a property of the view. and select the title block. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet.

indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it. click Viewport : Title w Line. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. indicating the view is deactivated. click Deactivate View. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. right-click. and click View Properties. 28 Right-click the view. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. The border and title block are grayed out. click Activate View. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and click OK. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20.27 With the view selected. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. and click View Properties. select 1:20 for View Scale. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view. The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. 32 Select the viewport. on the View menu. under Graphics.

and select Wall faces for Prefer. as shown in the following illustration. Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. click . and click to place the dimension.Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. 36 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. as shown in the following illustration. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner). and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. click Modify. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. ■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. and click Activate View. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior.

double-click Level 1 Furniture. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. right-click. are specific to the view in which they are created. and the door is updated. double-click Level 1. Dimensions. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 44 Proceed to the next exercise. however.41 Select the view. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. 42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. Adding a Sheet to the Project. and click Deactivate View.

Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. select A0 metric. add the furniture plan view. and click OK. m_Drawing_Exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.rvt. A102 . under Identity Data. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Sheet. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click . 3 Select the title block. The sheet is incrementally named A102.Furniture Plan Level 1. you add a new sheet to the project. the new sheet. and on the Options Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . and click OK. and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. is displayed. under Sheets (all).

3 On the Design Bar. and select 1:20. 6 On the View Control Bar. double-click A102 . under Floor Plans.Furniture Plan Level 1. and click to place the view. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. click the scale value. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. click Modify. m_Drawing_Exercise. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed. double-click Level 1 Furniture. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. under Sheets (all). You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. and click Activate View. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building.rvt. right-click on the view on sheet A102. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. 4 In the Type Selector. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Project Browser.

and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall. chair. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. 10 On the Window menu. The changes made to the lamp. The desk.6 Select one of the furniture components. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. 7 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. furniture. select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. enter 5200 mm. click Modify.

you learn how to create new elevation. click Callout. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. double-click Level 1 Furniture. callout.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. and select the dashed callout view border. click Modify. 326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . m_Drawing_Exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag. and move it to the position shown in the following illustration.rvt. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet.

10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. click the scale value. and select 1:20. click Sheet. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. click Add View. select A0 Metric. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. 11 In the Views dialog box. click Modify.Unnamed. and click OK. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. The new sheet. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. Change the callout view scale. position the view. A103 . and click to place the view. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. and click Add View to Sheet.6 On the Design Bar.

17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. Create a new elevation view. click Modify. and click to place the elevation symbol. 18 On the Design Bar. center it in the room so that it points north. click Elevation. double-click Level 1 Furniture. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. select the elevation symbol arrow. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . As you move the cursor. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number.

19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). click Add View.a and Elevation 1 . 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . 24 In the Views dialog box. 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol. and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . double-click A103 . The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. and click Add View to Sheet.a.c. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Unnamed. expand Elevations. 21 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

27 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture. 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. under Sheets (all). Create a section view. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol.Furniture Plan Level 1. 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building. 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room.26 Add Elevation 1 . double-click A102 . and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.

select 1:50 for Scale. click Section. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). 32 In the Options Bar.

and click Add View to Sheet. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 37 In the Views dialog box. and click View Properties. 42 Right-click on the view.Unnamed. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. and click OK. 45 Close the exercise file. and click Activate View. 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. and to create new views of your building model. The drawing sheet is now complete. 44 If you want to save your changes. double-click A103 . under Graphics. click Custom for View Scale. and sections.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Section: Section 1. such as callouts. 39 Right-click on the view. on the File menu. 38 Right-click on the viewport. click Save As. add views to your sheets. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. elevations. and click Deactivate View. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . modify the building model from your sheets. click Add View.

you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. expand Legends. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. door frame schedule. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. On construction documents. On construction documents. click Open.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Open m_Legends. click New ➤ Legend. enter Symbol Legend for Name. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . windows. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. click Symbol.rvt located in the Metric folder. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and so on). click the Training Files icon. and click OK. and door frames. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends.Filled Level Head . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. Finally. 2 In the Project Browser. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . doors.

enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser. click Modify to end the command. enter 3mm for Name. click Duplicate. expand Sheets (all). 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . you create a text type with the necessary size. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. select Text : 6mm. and click OK. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. and click OK twice. click Edit/New. enter 3mm for Text Size. You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Symbol Legend. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 15 Working from the top down.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. and double-click A100 . 8 In the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. click Text. and click to place it. 9 On the Options bar. 18 On the Design Bar. 12 Under Text.

click Save As.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. 3 Right-click Legend 1. expand Legends. 6 On the Options Bar. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory. Using Legends | 335 . enter Wall Type Legend for Name. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model.rvt.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. click Legend Component. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Wall Type Legend. 7 Select Section for View. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. and click OK. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. name the file m_Legends_in progress. 19 On the File menu. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.rvt. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior . click New ➤ Legend. 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. and click Rename. m_Legends_in progress. and click Save.Brick on CMU for Family.

17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. 11 In the Type Selector. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 12 On the Options bar. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. click Text. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . The text note with leader is added to the legend.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to add a single-segment leader.

22 On the Design Bar. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. 23 In the Type Selector. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter Wall Type 1. 27 In the Project Browser. 24 Below the title text of the upper component. drag it onto the sheet. click Detail Lines. double-click A100 . select Text : 6mm. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 26 In the Project Browser.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 19 On the Options Bar. click Save. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. Using a Legend View to Match Types. click Wall Type Legend. click Modify to end the command. click to add text without a leader. add an identical detail line below the lower component. 29 On the File menu. and click to place it above the symbol legend. 28 On the Design Bar. Using Legends | 337 . select Medium Lines. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.

6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Window menu. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . indicating that it captured the wall type properties. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. select Medium for Detail Level. click . so that you are zoomed in to the walls. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled.rvt. 8 On the View Control Bar. m_Legends_in_progress. 5 In the floor plan view. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. The open drawings are both visible. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. click Tile. select the wall type 1 component.

verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. if the active revision is number 1. In this exercise. 9 On the File menu. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. contractor inquiries. click Open. If you select By Sheet. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project.rvt located in the Metric folder. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. click Close. Open m_Revisions. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. When Issued is selected. Using Revision Tracking.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. click Revisions. Using the table. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. When you use this option. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. or changes in building material availability. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. For example. click the Training Files icon. yet as concise as possible. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 Click on the value for Description. and enter a date. the revision is locked and issued to the field. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. You can create a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests.

any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it.If Visible is not selected. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 7 Click OK. enter 1200 mm. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . select the window. Revision clouds have read-only properties. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Save. expand Views.rvt. Sketching Revision Clouds. 3 In the small empty room. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. In most instances. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and expand Floor Plans. you make changes to the project floor plan. and press ENTER.rvt. name the file m_Revisions-in progress. 8 On the File menu. click Save As. including revision number and revision date. 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. m_Revisions-in progress. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued.

m_Revisions-in progress. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. 14 On the Design Bar. you load a revision tag into the project. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. 8 Click to place the second window. Tagging Revision Clouds. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. 15 On the File menu. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point.rvt. Using Revision Tracking | 341 . on the Edit toolbar. click Save. click Modify to end the command. click Revision Cloud. click Finish Sketch.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. click near the windows you have changed. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 In the drawing area. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm.

click to place the floor plan. and click Open.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Revisions-in progress. and click OK. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. click Tags. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and because the revision is the first in the project. 3 In the Tags dialog box. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. the cloud is tagged as number 1. click Save. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. 4 In the drawing area. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. 6 In the Tags. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. 8 In the drawing area. Because you chose to number by project. 2 On the Options Bar. click Tag. You then issue a revision. on which you place a revised view. and drag it onto the sheet view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. dialog box. you need to add one. A new sheet view is created in the project. click OK. verify that A0 Metric is selected. In the Tags dialog box. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 10 On the File menu. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. 4 Click Load. select Level 1. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Working with Revisions. the tag is displayed inside the cloud.rfa. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 9 Click to place the tag. you create a sheet view in your project. scroll down to Revision Clouds. under Floor Plans. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. click New ➤ Sheet.rvt. clear Leader. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 5 In the Open dialog box. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

and click OK. click New. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. 15 On the File menu. 14 Click OK. You can continue to add revisions. On the Settings menu. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. NOTE After you issue a revision. 9 Select Issued. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. You do this by issuing the revision. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. click Revisions. 11 In the Revisions dialog box.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . you prevent further changes to the revision. click Close. click Revisions. enter a name for Issued to. clear Visible for each issued revision. under Add. On the Settings menu. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. you can no longer modify it. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

345 . you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. plywood. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. In this tutorial. These components scale with the building model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. and metal studs. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. like a standard detail that you want to add to a library.

rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Cape_House. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. add detail components. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser. you detail the foundation sill of a small house. you trace over the building model geometry. click Open. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). and double-click First Floor. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout. In order to detail from the building model. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. click the Training Files icon. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. 346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. In the callout view. The callout defines the extents of the callout view.

click Modify and select the section line. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. 3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 .2 On the Design Bar.

select 1:5 for Scale. Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. and click the tab in the context menu. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing .Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar. click Callout. click Modify. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. 8 On the Options Bar. click Modify. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. and select the callout border. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view.

click Modify and double-click the callout head. 13 On the View menu. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. select the First Floor level line. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style. 15 Click OK. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 . click View Properties. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. 16 In the view.Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. The callout view is displayed.

350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and insulation objects. 2 On the Design Bar. and an anchor bolt. 3 In the Type Selector. sub-flooring. 4 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. select Wide Lines. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. which means that any detail components. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. m_Cape_House. you detail the view of the foundation sill. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. Detailing the View In this exercise. region objects. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall.17 Proceed to the next exercise. as well as detail lines. Exact dimensions are not important. Detailing the View. They are also view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs.rvt. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. siding. select Chain and click .

click Region Properties. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box.6 On the Design Bar. select <Invisible lines>. select EARTH. enter Earth for Name. 12 Click OK three times. and click OK. click Duplicate. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. the pattern does not display. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. 13 On the Design Bar. under Name and Pattern. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . If you are zoomed in too far. 9 In the Name dialog box. 14 In the Type Selector.

23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. click Detail Component. click . 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235.rfa. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. 21 In the Type Selector.Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open. 18 In the Open dialog box.

Section: 38x140. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 . select M_Dimension Lumber.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. and place it in the detail view. 25 In the Type Selector.

27 In the Type Selector.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. select M_Plywood : 25mm.

click Duplicate. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Inside. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click Repeating Detail. 33 In the Type Selector. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . click Detail Component. . enter Lap Siding for Name. enter 19 mm for Thickness.30 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. and click OK. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. and click to place the lap siding. click . Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 38 In the Name dialog box. When you place the repeating detail component. 35 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None.

on the Design Bar. they are view specific.rvt. click Detail Lines. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. meaning they display only in this view.NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. click Wide Lines. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . you add lines to your detail. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. m_Cape_House. Like detail components. 2 In the Type Selector. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. Adding Detail Lines. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood.

and click OK. 13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. select Medium lines. select . Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . 12 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. click Filled Region.4 On the View menu. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. and click . select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. 11 In the Type Selector. click View Properties. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. select Chain. 6 On the Design Bar. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box.

16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Region Properties. and click OK. 17 In the Name dialog box. click Edit/New.14 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Design Bar. 20 Click OK three times. select Gypsum-Plaster. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Name and Pattern. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. click Duplicate. enter Plasterboard for Name. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box.

click Filled Region. click Edit/New. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. 23 In the Type Selector. under Name and Pattern. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. 33 On the Design Bar. click New. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Near the end of this lesson. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. select Medium Lines. under Modify Subcategories. you turn off the display of the model geometry. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. enter Vapor Barrier for Name. click Line Styles. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click Region Properties.rvt. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. 31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 32 Click OK three times. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Concrete. click Duplicate. 29 In the Name dialog box. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. the region would be blank. m_Cape_House. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. select . and click OK. enter Concrete for Name.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Select Black for Line Color. 360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Insulation. you add break lines to the detail. select Vapor Barrier. 8 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. Select Dash for Line Pattern. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 7 In the Type Selector. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. click and enter 28mm for Offset.4 Under Lines Styles. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. click Detail Lines. Adding Break Lines. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center.

m_Cape_House. select M_Break Line. click Detail Component. 7 In the Type Selector. 2 In the Type Selector. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. click Modify.rvt.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. verify that M_Break Line is selected. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 . Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration.

10 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. select Do not display for Display model. as shown in the following illustration. click View Properties. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and click OK. and select the break line. Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu.9 On the Design Bar. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. When you turn the display model off.

Adding Text Notes. on the File menu.13 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text. select 4 mm text for Text size. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 2 On the Type Selector. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 5 If you want to save your changes. click to create a leader with two segments. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. 3 On the Options Bar. click Save As. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow.rvt. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Enter the text. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. Click again to set the location of the text box.

The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and double-click Basement. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. For example. such as walls and windows. Within a detail view. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. click Open. click the Training Files icon. display in coarse detail. Open c_Office_Building. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. while other model elements.

click . The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. select it. and when it highlights. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. click . 4 With the sink selected. behind the cabinet. on the Options Bar. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 .Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. on the Options Bar.

using halftone. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. and overriding detail level settings. c_Office_Building. a cabinet. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. and a simple fill pattern. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . double-click Level 1. select Tile. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Window menu.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. 3 On the View menu.

and double-click Level 1. click the Annotation Categories tab. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. click the Model Categories tab. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. 13 On the View menu. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 7 On the View menu. expand Floor Plans. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. 10 Click OK. and select Halftone. select Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 12 On the View menu. The door tags are not displayed. 9 Under Visibility. scroll down to Furniture. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . select Visibility/Graphics. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. and click Apply. expand Views (all).

click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. select Coarse for Detail Level. 18 For Walls. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. Select Black for Line Color. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. Select 8 for Line Weight. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 21 Click OK twice. click the Model Categories tab. and click Apply. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Select Solid for Line Pattern.

as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. expand Views (all). you create a door detail in the new drafting view. click Save As. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. In the next exercise. is displayed in the Project Browser. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. and expand Drafting Views. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. on the File menu. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. The new drafting view. After you create a drafting view. 5 Proceed to the next exercise.22 If you want to save your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. named Door Detail. Select 1:5 for Scale. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. 4 In the Project Browser. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. click Open. click the Training Files icon. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model.rvt located in the Metric folder. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. you learn how to create a drafted detail. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click New ➤ Drafting View. Open m_Drafting_views.

2 In the Type Selector. When the dimension value displays in blue. m_Drafting_views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. After you create a dimension. click Dimension. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. you can change it.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. click Detail Lines. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Wide Lines. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration.

On the Design Bar. clear Length dimension snap increments. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . and click OK. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown. click Snaps. click Filled Region. click Detail Lines. click . 11 On the Design Bar. enter Sand. 17 Under Pattern Type. and click OK 3 times.Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. verify Drafting is selected. under Name. click Region Properties. select Wide Lines. click Finish Sketch. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Lines. 20 In the Type Selector. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 In the Name dialog box. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. 19 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. select Sand. Under Dimension Snaps. 18 On the Design Bar.

24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb.22 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and add 2 dimensions to the door trim. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

click Edit/New. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Select the desired dimensions. click . 27 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click the Hide/Isolate command. 30 In the Type Selector. enter 38 x 125. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. select Medium Lines. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. click Detail Lines. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. and click OK twice. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. click Duplicate. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. and on the View Control Bar. Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . and click Hide Object from the context menu. 34 In the Name dialog box. click Detail Component. enter 125 for the Width type parameter.

40 In the Type Selector. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar. 41 Add two break lines as shown. click Detail Component.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Break Line. TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . click Text. click New ➤ Sheet. 47 In the Project Browser. expand Views. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. verify that A0 metric is selected. click Modify to end the command.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. and click OK. and drag it onto the sheet. 46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and expand Drafting Views. 43 In the Options Bar. 50 On the Design Bar. 48 Select Door Detail. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. click to create a leader with two segments.

7 On the View menu.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. DGN. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. select m_Rail_detail.rvt. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. The detail is imported as an import symbol. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. In order to modify it. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements. select Preserve colors. 3 Click OK. After you explode it. m_Drafting_views. under Layer/Level Colors.51 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. select New ➤ Drafting View. DXF. Enter 5 for the Scale value. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . and then click Open. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. Select Custom for Scale. The detail that you import is in DWG format. you must explode it.

and then select the detail. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK 3 times. press and hold CTRL. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Delete Element(s).Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and select all of the text blocks in the detail. and click Full Explode. 10 If an error dialog box displays. The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. 9 Right-click. select black. click Edit/New. 15 In the Color dialog box. The text retains the DWG layer color. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. click . Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 .

19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. click Modify. click .Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. MET STUD FRAMING. A leader is added to the text note. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. and select the bottom text note. Creating a Reference Callout. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

and use the callout grips to move the callout head. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. expand Views (all). and double-click Section 1. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). expand Sections. click Callout. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 . 3 On the Options Bar. The section view is displayed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Drafting_views. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt.Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. select Reference other view. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner. The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. 6 Select the callout. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. click Modify. and double-click the callout.

on the File menu. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name.8 If you want to save your changes. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . close the exercise file without saving your changes. Otherwise.

381 . you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Scheduling 13 In this tutorial.

When you schedule building components in Revit Building. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. creating a type schedule. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. you can list each component as a separate line item. you learn how to create type and instance schedules. You begin by creating an instance schedule. creating an instance schedule.

right-click in the Design Bar. select Windows.rvt located in the Metric folder. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. click Open. click the Fields tab. 4 Under Available fields. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.Next. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Open m_Schedules. select Comments and click Add. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Using the same process. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . under Category. Finally. 7 Click OK. and click OK. and click View. click Schedule/Quantities.

click Close. 11 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. under Other. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. click Show. 16 Click OK twice. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. this can be a time-consuming process. However. sorted by type mark. NOTE By clicking Show. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. The window schedule is displayed. in large building models with many views. 384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click View Properties. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. expand Schedules/Quantities.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule.

and click View Properties. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. The window type schedule is displayed. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. clear Itemize every instance. on the File menu. 20 Click OK twice. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. 21 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 22 Close the exercise file. click Save As. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 .Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

click Schedule/Quantities. select Number and click Add. Open m_Schedules. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click OK.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. under Category. select Rooms. click the Fields tab. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. click Open. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. expand Floor Plans. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 3 In the New Schedule dialog box. expand Views (all). 5 Under Available fields.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and click View. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields.

next to Rows:. 9 To the right of Header text. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 . add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. you define the font for the schedule headers. click New.6 Using the same process. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. The room Number is 1. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. 8 Click the Appearance tab. Next. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. 10 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and select Conference from the list. The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. double-click flr 3. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. and enter 30. and enter Conference to change the room name. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. add a second room.12 Using the same process. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. None of the rooms have tags placed on them.

and click Drafting. select 29 Conference for Room. 23 In the Project Browser. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. expand Schedules/Quantities. and verify that Horizontal is selected. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room. 21 On the Options Bar. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. and click to place the room tag. 19 On the Options Bar. click Room Tag. 20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. right-click in the Design Bar.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select 30 Conference for Room. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 .

click Room Tag. 28 In the Project Browser. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. select Auto for Room. under Schedules/Quantities. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . double-click flr 3. 25 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar.

30 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . double-click flr 3. click Modify.11 square meters. and click OK. 34 On the Design Bar. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Office for Name. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. locate the room with an area of 92. select Services for Name. press and hold CTRL. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. and select Circulation for Name. click . 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. 32 With the room tags selected. 31 On the Design Bar. and zoom in on the room.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. click Modify. and click OK. 35 With the room tags selected. click . press and hold CTRL. under Identity Data. and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration.

Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish. under Available fields. 45 On the Options Bar. under Category. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Base Finish. and click OK. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Schedule/Quantities. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. and Wall Finish. 43 In the new row. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. press and hold CTRL. Floor Finish. and click Add. 44 Using the same process. 392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Rooms. click New to add a row to the schedule. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. and enter Std Office. click the Key Name field. 39 Select Schedule keys.

59 Click OK twice to update the schedule. click Modify.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click flr 3. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. click . 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. under Other. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Exec Offices for Room Style. double-click Room Schedule. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click Edit for Fields. and click OK. 55 On the View menu. under Other. under Schedules/Quantities. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . click Modify. select Room Style. 48 On the Design Bar. click View Properties. and click OK. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. 52 On the Options Bar. View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. 51 On the Design Bar. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. 56 Under Other. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. 38. 49 On the Options Bar. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Available fields. and click Add. press and hold CTRL. click .

Creating a Room Color Diagram. you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . select Services from the list in the Room Style column. 61 Proceed to the next exercise.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.

click Color Fill. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. scroll all the way to the left.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click the color green. under Views (all). 11 Click OK three times. click OK. m_schedules. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the color button for Conference. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. 7 On the Options Bar. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 . 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. expand Floor Plans.rvt. A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click Edit Color Scheme. click Modify. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green. 9 In the Color dialog box. and select the color legend. click PANTONE. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. 5 In the alert dialog box. and double-click flr 3.

double-click flr 3. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click the Fields tab. 16 Close the exercise file. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. double-click Room Schedule. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. number. 15 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. graphics are displayed with imperial values. under Schedules/Quantities. 13 In the Room Schedule. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made. Open c_Schedules_2. right-click in the Design Bar. click Open. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. 4 Under Available fields. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. click Save As. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click the Training Files icon. select Walls.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls.rvt located in the Common folder. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. To display graphics with metric values. under Categories. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and level. and click OK. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.

expand Schedules/Quantities. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule. 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Fields. under Other. 10 Click OK twice.

Interiors. and then click in the schedule. and select C1010115 . expand C1010 . and click .Brick Veneer w/ Stud. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. and double-click Level 1. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Partitions .Partitions. expand C1010100 . click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser.Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. under Views (all). expand C .Fixed Partitions. 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. expand C10 . 13 Click OK. All of the walls of this wall type are updated. expand Floor Plans.Interior Construction.

and then click . double-click Wall Schedule. expand C1010. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . 21 Click OK three times.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 17 On the Options Bar. expand C. click . expand C1010100. under Identity Data. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box.16 Select one of the Interior . expand C10.Partitions . double-click Furniture Schedule. and select C1010145 . 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. 22 In the Project Browser. click in the Assembly Code field. click Edit/New.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls. under Schedules/Quantities. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser.

28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from. select Room for Select available fields from. and click OK. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box.24 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. click Edit for Fields. right-click Furniture Schedule. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place it. under Other. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. click Sheet. Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 29 Click OK twice. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .

35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. These shared parameters can be added to any family. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and save the exercise file with a unique name. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. 37 If you want to save your changes. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. click Save As. and are defined and stored in an external file. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. 38 Close the exercise file. regardless of category. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. you create a multi-category schedule. and creating a multi-category schedule. on the File menu. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. adding the shared parameters to a family.

and click Save. click Create. ID. under Groups. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. click New. and click OK. click New. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. and assign Text for Type. 7 Under Parameters. 10 After you add the parameters. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. enter a file name.You create shared parameters. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. enter Hardware. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Save As dialog box. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. click OK. If you are working on a network. select Text for Type. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. 9 Add three additional parameters. and Lock Set. add them to a door family. Hinge. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. click Shared Parameters. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and then generate the multi-category schedule. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. and click OK. enter Closure for Name.

and click Select. and click OK.rfa located in the Common folder. and click OK. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. 15 In the Family Types dialog box. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You are now working in the Family Editor. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. under Parameters. setting them as Type parameters. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. click the Training Files icon. select Shared parameter. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. click Open. 13 Open c_ Door. click Add. 23 On the File menu. Enter N/A for Closure. under Parameters. select ID. so that you can use it later in this exercise. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. 14 On the Design Bar. select Instance. click Family Types. click Close to close the file. Enter Chrome for Hinge. Enter 1 for ID. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 21 Click OK.

39 On the File menu. 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box.. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i.e. select ID.rft in the Annotations folder. 31 Under Parameters. as shown. the tag cannot attach to any component. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box.rvt located in the Common folder. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. select Hardware. 26 On Design Bar. click . click Close to close the file. 25 In the New dialog box. 36 On the Options Bar. select Filter parameter. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Lines. ID). and click OK twice. 33 Click OK. 41 In the Open dialog box. and click Open.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. under Parameter Group. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. select Multi-Category Tag. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. and click Open. click Label. 35 On the Design Bar. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. select c_Hardware_Plan. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. click Select. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Add. Open.

52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.rfa that you just created. click Tag. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and click OK. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 47 Click to place the tag.rfa and NewDoor. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. select Multi-Category from the list. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. and click OK. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Schedule/Quantities. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. 53 Click OK. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . 45 In the Type Selector.42 On the File menu.

The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model.The multi-category schedule is displayed. you create a level based door schedule. click the Training Files icon. There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. 54 If you want to save your changes. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. based on wall area. However.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . click Save As.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. click Schedule/Quantities.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . on the File menu. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. expand Views (all). You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule. Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create two schedules.rvt located in the Metric folder. you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above. click Open. The floor plan is displayed. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. expand Floor Plans. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. and double-click Level 3. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

click the Fields tab. click the Filter tab. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. click Edit for Filter. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab.Level 3. 6 Under Available fields. select Level. and click OK. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. 10 Under Fields. enter Doors . This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. 11 Under Field formatting. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by. Select Level 3 in the third menu. Select equals in the second menu. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. Verify Schedule building components is selected. select Doors. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 12 Right-click the schedule. 4 Click OK.3 In the New Schedule dialog box. select the following fields. under Other. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click View Properties. 15 Click OK twice. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. select Hidden Field. Under Name. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . and select (none) for Filter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category.

click Schedule/Quantities. m_First_Project-West_Wing. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Under Fields. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. enter Cost/Sq.16 On the Standard toolbar. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 3 Click OK. The schedule is displayed. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. click the Fields tab.rvt. 13 Click OK. 5 Under Available fields. select the following fields. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. Use the cost values in the following illustration. select Area. and then under Field Formatting. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. 11 Under Heading. m to more accurately represent the data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. 12 Under Fields. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Cost. select Walls.

on the File menu. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. under Other. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. 25 Click OK. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. 21 Under Fields. They cannot be shared with other projects and. you cannot use them to tag objects. unlike shared parameters. 29 Close the exercise file. 19 Click OK. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 .Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. The schedule is displayed. and save the exercise file with a unique name. m column. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. select Total Cost. click Save As. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. 23 Click Field Format. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. 20 Click the Formatting tab. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. Select Fixed for Units. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. without the value it would have a unit of area. 22 Under Field formatting. Verify that Number is selected for Type. click Calculated Value. click Edit for Fields. 24 In the Format dialog box. and click OK twice. you learn how to schedule project parameters. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 28 If you want to save your changes. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. right-click in the Design Bar. Enter Occupant for Name. click Room Tag. click the Training Files icon. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. either by entering it directly. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Occupant. and click Drafting. Under Categories. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. Open m_Office_2. click Open. click Project Parameters. 5 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. After you create the schedule.Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. 4 Click OK. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. click Add to create the new parameter.

11 Under Available fields. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Schedule/Quantities. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. select the following fields. click the Fields tab. 15 Close the exercise file. under Categories. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. click Save As. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . and click OK. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Rooms to create a room schedule.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 14 If you want to save your changes. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule.

and click OK to create the database. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. click Open. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. and click Next. in addition to the Id column.mdb for Database Name. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. select a location for the database file. under Database. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. enter Revit_Project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. 9 Under Directories. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. 1 On the File menu. click Create. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 13 Close the exercise file. 8 In the New Database dialog box. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and open the database in Microsoft Access. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. click OK. and click Next. under Database Name. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. 10 When the confirmation displays. Additionally. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element.rvt located in the Common folder. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule. For example. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. 3 Click New. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. click the File Data Source tab. click OK in the dialog box. click the Training Files icon. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes. 6 Click Finish. Open c_Schedules_2.

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. 413 . and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial.

expand Elevations. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_simple_house. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. click Open. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. and not 4 m. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. expand Views (all).Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. Level 1 reads 1500 m. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. and not 1504 m. click the Training Files icon. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt located in the Metric folder. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. while Level 2 reads 4 m. For example. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. For example. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. and Level 2 reads 1504 m. and double-click South. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level.

click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm.Shared. select Shared for Elevation Base. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. By entering 10000 mm in this step. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Select the Level 2 line. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. and click OK. under Constraints.2 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. If you did that now. enter Level . click Edit/New. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. you specify the new location of the project. 8 Click OK twice. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared.Shared. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. select Level : Level . to better demonstrate how shared levels work. and you must create a new level type. However. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. 12 On the View menu. 3 On the Options Bar. enter 10000 mm. 10 Select the Level 1 line. and press ENTER. The south elevation is displayed. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration. 14 In the Type Selector. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . 6 In the Name dialog box. click . 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate.

except when you sketch profiles to create families. 16 Using the same method. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. define the roof level as shared. on the File menu. In Revit Building. and save the exercise file with a unique name. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning In this lesson. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 17 If you want to save your changes. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. permanent dimensions are created automatically. double-click North. click Save As. as well as other views of the building model. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . under Elevations. In this case. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs.15 In the Project Browser.

move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. click Open. Dimensioning | 417 . The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. By default. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. and angular dimensions. click Dimension. select it. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select it. that you can add to your drawings. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. click the Training Files icon. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. multi-segmented. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. Open m_Dimensions. radial. linear. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. The dimension displays in the drawing. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. indicating that the dimension can be modified. outside of the wall. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. The lock displays as locked. click Dimension.5 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the dimension. 6 Click the lock. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. In addition. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . and click to set the location of the dimension.

click Dimension. 11 On the Options Bar. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other. click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. and click to place the dimension.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 419 . Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall. indicating that the segments are now equal.

and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 14 On the Design Bar. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. 15 On the Design Bar. the default dimension option. and press DELETE.13 On the View menu. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. click Dimension. 16 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. click Modify. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. Select the inside face of the wall. and zoom in around the curved wall.

20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. and click to place the dimension. click . Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. and depends on the cursor tracking behavior. and click to place the dimension. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. as shown in the following illustration. Move your cursor to the right. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. Dimensioning | 421 . Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis.

Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. but do not select anything. you learn to add. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. However. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. including the wall centerline. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Controlling Witness Line Location. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. click Modify. in some cases. select it. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. 24 Proceed to the next exercise. for a multi-segmented dimension. a different wall selection choice highlights. For example.23 On the Design Bar. m_Dimensions. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. delete. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. click Dimension. When you place dimensions. 2 On the Options Bar. and press TAB repeatedly. Each time you press TAB. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise.

Dimensioning | 423 . click Modify.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. and select it. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face.

The witness line moves to the inside wall face. 13 Click the control box again. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the wall centerline.12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. but do not select it. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall.

16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed. If you right-click the control box. click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. The witness line is deleted. and click Delete Witness Line. Modifying Dimension Properties. Dimensioning | 425 . 19 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Dimensions. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 18 To end the editing command. The full dimension string is displayed again. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall.15 Right-click the control box.

6 On the Design Bar. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. on the File menu. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. click . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Right. 5 Click OK twice. Under Text. then Up for Read Convention. Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. when sketching walls. As you create components. 7 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.2 On the Options Bar. click Save As. a lock symbol immediately displays. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. Working with Alignments and Constraints. click Modify. if two or more walls are colinear. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. For example. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort.

select Multiple Alignment. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer.rvt located in the Metric folder. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. indicating that the Align command is active. The symbol changes to a closed lock. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. click the Training Files icon. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip. Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. click Open. Dimensioning | 427 . 5 On the Options Bar. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left. When you align two components. click . 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. Open m_Alignment. 3 Click the lock. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar.

click Modify. 11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked). 10 On the Design Bar. 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it.7 Select the short wall to the left.

16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. Move the walls to verify the alignment. NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. click once to undo the move. select Multiple Alignment. 13 Click the right wall. click . the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors.12 On the toolbar. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 On the Options bar. Dimensioning | 429 .

20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it.17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left.

A lock is displayed.28 to align the windows. 29 To view the constraint. click and repeat steps 27 . The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. click . and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. clear Multiple Alignment. 31 On the Tools toolbar. The two windows align. 27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click Modify. indicating the constraint. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. Dimensioning | 431 . on the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar.Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall.

1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows. as shown in the following illustration. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise.32 Align the remaining windows. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. m_Alignment. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt.

on the File menu. 3 On the Options Bar. Select Entire Walls for Pick. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . The two vertical walls highlight.2 On the Design Bar. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and then Widths. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. click Dimension. and save the exercise file with a unique name. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. Click Options. select Openings. the windows). 5 Click OK. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 8 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. Dimensioning | 433 . Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. tag doors and windows. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. click the Training Files icon. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration. you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. click . click Open.Annotating In this lesson.rvt located in the Common folder. rotate tags with building components. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . expand Views (all). 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. Open c_Area. expand Floor Plans.

3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. c_Area. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Room Tag.rvt. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged. Annotating | 435 .5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. and click to place the room tag. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click it. click Modify. Click to place the new tag. 7 Continue to place room tags. and select the room tag. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102. click Room tag. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. The room tag number displays in blue.4 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. and press ENTER. 5 Zoom in on the tag number. enter 101. Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. indicating that it can be edited.

Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. c_Area. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. to add a tag with a leader.rvt. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. click Door. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. 3 On the Options Bar. and clear Leader. click Door. and select Leader. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Tagging Doors and Windows. 2 In the Type Selector. Annotating | 437 . as shown in the following illustration.

15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 16 Under Leader. The door is tagged with a tag and leader.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. clear Tag on placement. 10 Place the door below Door 6. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Window Tags. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. 9 On the Options Bar. clear Create. Notice that the door is placed without a tag. and then click OK. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Category. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. select Create. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click Door. 13 Under Leader. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

or close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name.17 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. Annotating | 439 .

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

you learn how to change the visibility of detail components.Viewing 15 In this tutorial. how to control fill pattern colors. you learn to create and customize views of building information models. More specifically. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. 441 .

Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . including elevation and three-dimensional views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click Open. you learn how to access different views of the building model. Open m_Viewing_Exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Elevations. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. 2 In the Project Browser. sections. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. locate the Project Browser. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. You create elevations. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. expand Views (all). click . and double-click East. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. on the Standard toolbar. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and three-dimensional (3D) views.

Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click . 8 Click OK. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. and click Hidden Line. click Visibility/Graphics. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This change is applied only to the active view. This change is applied only in this elevation view. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. the east elevation. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The default name of the view is {3D}. scroll down and clear Window Tags. click Model Graphics Style. 7 Under Visibility. click the Annotation Categories tab.

. and click OK. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. . 17 In the Rename View dialog box. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. right-click {3D}. The view follows the movement of the cursor. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. and click Rename. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 13 Press and hold CTRL. and expand 3D Views.10 On the View toolbar. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. double-click My 3D View. and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. expand Views (all). Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. click to reorient the view. 19 In the Project Browser. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. zoom. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. You can pan. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . enter My 3D View. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. click X to close the view. under 3D Views. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel.

and double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. m_Viewing_Exercise. eye height. expand Views (all). the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. outside of the dimension lines. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active.Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. click Camera. Cameras define the eye point. After you specify the second point (the view target). as shown in the following illustration. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. and distance from the target. and click View. right-click in the Design Bar.

click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. Move the cursor up. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. 5 On the View menu. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . down. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. and sideways to see how the view changes.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. click Dynamically Modify View. Press and hold the left mouse button. Press and hold the left mouse button.

Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Four views of the model display in the drawing area. 13 On the View menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. Press and hold the left mouse button. click Tile. Change the camera position. and target 12 On the Window menu. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. height.

15 In the Project Browser. click 3D View 1. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click Level 1. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing .14 In the Project Browser. and click Show Camera. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. and move it to another location. 17 In My 3D View. 16 Right-click. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views.

right-click. under Camera. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . 20 On the View Control Bar. In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Shading. click Model Graphics Style. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View. and click Properties. Click OK. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. click to create a new 3D view.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera.

select Section Box. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. click View Properties. 24 Click the section box. A rotation tool is also displayed. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. and click OK. under Extents. as shown in the following illustration.22 On the View menu. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . A section box is displayed around the model.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Section View In this exercise.rvt. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. Viewing a Building Model | 451 . and maximize this view. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Creating a Section View. expand Floor Plans.

You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 8 Select the section line. and double-click Section 1. click Section.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Find Referring Views. or in the Project Browser. right-click. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. double-click the section head. 6 Select the section view. 4 On the Design Bar. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. and click Open View. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. View the section 5 To view the section. select Floor Plan: Level 1. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

double-click Level 1. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. click Elevation. click Modify.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the change in the view direction. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views. 12 Select the section line. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Level 1. click Modify. under Floor Plans. Notice the change in section depth. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall.rvt. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . m_Viewing_Exercise. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise.

b. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. Do not select the arrow. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. 7 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Elevations.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. move the cursor around the building model. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. double-click Elevation 1 . The elevation is named Elevation 1 . and click. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. Elevation 1 . 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. double-click the elevation symbol arrow. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. Elevation 1 . Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model.a by default.a. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance.b. click Modify. 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view.

This includes walls. floors. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. For example. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. In addition. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. in a compound wall. on the File menu. and applies to phasing override materials as well. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. a shade of gray. and other families. roofs. in this case. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . such as the one below. such as Brick on CMU. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. and the insulation color to pink.11 If you want to save your changes. where each layer is assigned a different material. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. click Save As. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials.

click Open. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. The surface pattern of the brick is black. Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Showroom. click Color. 2 On the Settings menu. select red. and double-click 3D. 3 In the Materials dialog box. expand 3D Views.Brick for Name.rvt located in the Common folder. A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. 4 Under Cut Pattern. select Masonry . and double-click Wall/Floor Join .Level 3. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and click OK twice. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. scroll down and click the Training Files icon.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Materials. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views.Filled). 5 In the Color dialog box. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Sections (Section Head .

Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type. expand Views (all). 9 In the Materials dialog box. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. 10 Under Surface Pattern. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 . You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. click Materials. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Level 1.Brick for Name. you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. click Color.rvt. expand Floor Plans. c_Showroom. select Masonry . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 11 In the Color dialog box. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. select white. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice.

click Detail Level. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. under Graphics. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. click Save As. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . select a shade of gray. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. select Solid fill. and click OK three times. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. on the File menu. 12 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. click Modify. and click Properties. By default. 10 On the View Control Bar. and click Fine. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Level 2. and click . the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. under Graphics. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 5 In the Color dialog box. including the current view. click Edit/New. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. right-click. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field.

If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. line type. line color. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. and you cannot control their visibility.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. refer to the online Help for more information. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 . By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. or pattern. although they may have coincident edges. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you create more than one plan region in a file. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. the plan regions cannot overlap each other.

In the following illustration. Open m_Plan_Region. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. right-click in the Design Bar. the south elevation is also displayed. 460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Plan Region. click Open. and click View. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. expand Views (all).Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm.

This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. The plan region is no longer visible. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. under Extents. that is similar to the view range for plan views. right-click. click Edit for View Range. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. As the cursor moves across it. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and the view depth plane. and click Properties. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. top and bottom clip planes. click Finish Sketch. and then click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. Press ESC to end the command. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. click Modify. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. 3 In the Level 1 view. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.Plan regions have a single property. On the Options Bar. 7 In the View Range dialog box. click . 9 Click Apply. 5 Select the red dashed line. view range. You use the view range property to control cut plane. click Lines. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. By selecting Parent View’s Level. the top and bottom clip planes.

on the File menu. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . 11 If you want to save your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. and save the exercise file with a unique name.

to place and render decals to create signs. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and posters. billboards. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. 463 .

and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. the floor. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. After you create the perspective view. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. In this exercise. When you complete these changes. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and create the perspective view that you want to render. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you select a scene that defines the model environment. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model.

6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. verify that Co-house .Brick. click Open. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . click Edit for Structure.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. right-click in the Design Bar. Open m_Cohouse. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.rvt located in the Metric folder. click Wall. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Construction. and click the tab in the context menu. click . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Edit/New.Cavity Wall . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon.

200mm. click Materials. click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 21 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit for Structure. Polished and click OK. under Name. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. 8 In the Materials dialog box. and click Aluminum. under Name. 26 Click OK twice.Asphalt. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Construction. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar.Brick. select the curtain wall mullion again. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 18 In the Materials dialog box. .Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. under Name. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 Under Name. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. under _accurender. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. expand Metals. select Masonry . 14 On the Options Bar. click Materials.Plain. click Edit/New. 23 Under AccuRender.Running. expand Masonry and click Brick. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. enter Aluminum. 27 On the Design Bar. and click . click Duplicate. for Layer 2. 9 Under AccuRender. select Site . 24 In the Material Library. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. 25 Under Name. select Carib. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. select Polished. 19 Click OK four times. under _accurender.

Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. click No. verify that New is selected. click in the Material field. select Aluminum. Polished. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click Edit/New. . and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. click Region Raytrace. producing a photorealistic effect. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. floor. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). under Materials and Finishes. floor. 33 Click OK three times. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model. select Exterior under Type. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration.29 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . under Name.

click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. In a later exercise. when you render an exterior view of the model. Adding Trees to the Site. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. expand Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. and double-click 1st Flr. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .rvt. Cnst. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you place two different types of trees on the building site.38 On the Design Bar.

9 Meters. click Site Component. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. select M_Tree . and click to place a tree. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. and click Site. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 4 In the Type Selector. right-click in the Design Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 . TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.

click in the Value field for Plant Name. 13 Under Name. expand Trees and Shrubs. enter Black Oak. select Oak. Black. under accurender. m_Cohouse. and then click display the Plant Library. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. and place two black oak trees. and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. 15 Under Other. select any of the deciduous trees. under Other. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and click OK. under Identity Data. and click Deciduous. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. 7 In the Type Selector. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Site Component. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Plant Library. Creating a Perspective View. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. as shown in the following illustration. to . 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Modify. and click OK. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and click OK twice. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. 10 In the Name dialog box. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render.Create a new type of tree.

view open. The new perspective view is displayed. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. click Camera. Cnst. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 .

Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. expand 3D Views. view. and click Show Camera. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. Cnst. The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

and click OK. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. lighting. enter Exterior.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click Rename. right-click 3D View 1. m_Cohouse. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. double-click Exterior. place. 8 In the Rename View dialog box. date. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. under 3D Views.7 In the Project Browser. and environment settings that you use to render the view. you select a scene and specify time.

click the Solar Angles tab. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. and click Sun. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. under Scene Settings. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. click Settings. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 6 Select By Date. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. 8 Under Time. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. Time.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 7 Under Date. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box.

15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and enter bo. click Raytrace. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 11 Scroll down. MA. click Image Size. USA. 26 On the Design Bar. select Autumn for Plant Season. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. and select Boston. click No. under Background Color. and click OK.) 14 Click OK. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. Dark. click . 10 Click in the Cities list. under _accurender. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 17 Under Advanced. click Site. 19 In the Material Library. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. 20 In the Name list. click Environment. select Ground Plane. Rye. 16 In the Environment dialog box. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. select Good for Quality. 12 Click the Settings Tab.00 (many clouds. 27 On the Options Bar. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. and click OK.20 for Cloudiness. select Grass. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. 21 Click OK twice. under Scene Settings.9 Click the Place tab. 13 Enter . under Scene Settings. 18 Click Material.

click Capture Rendering. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. click Save As. To create the rendered scene. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. expand Renderings. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. Rendering an Interior View. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. 30 On the Design Bar. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. and finally.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. Adding RPC People In this exercise. 32 If you want to save this exercise. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. define the view and render scene settings. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. on the File menu. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view.

rvt. click Component. Cnst. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 7 Repeat steps 4 . select M_RPC Female: Cathy. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 2nd Flr. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . m_Cohouse.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). expand Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast).

Creating the Interior Perspective View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse.8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table.

Cnst. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . double-click 2nd Flr. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.The interior perspective is displayed. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.

12 On the View menu. enter 178 mm for Height. enter 229 mm for Width. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. and select the section box. 14 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. under Size. right-click 3D View 1. click to display the 3D view of the building model. select Section Box. and click OK. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. click Modify. and click Rename. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . A section box is displayed around the building model. and click OK. under Extents. and click OK. enter Interior. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. Grips are displayed on the section box. click the dimensions for Size. click View Properties. 11 On the View menu.Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box.

double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under 3D Views. By limiting the geometry. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. date. you reduce the rendering time. Creating a New Render Scene. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. and environment settings used to render the view. m_Cohouse. you create a render scene to specify the time. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. place. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible.

When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and enter Interior Scene for Name. 7 Select By Date. and click Sun. 12 Scroll down. select Summer for Plant Season. 11 Click in the Cities list. 19 Click Material. such as windows and doors. Time. and click OK. click OK. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. select New. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 9 Under Time. 10 Click the Place tab. click Settings. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 21 In the Name list. click Environment. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. MA. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. select {3D}. under 3D Views. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. select Grass. USA. click the Solar Angles tab. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. and select Boston. on the Main tab. under Use View’s Section Box. 13 Click the Settings tab. 24 Under Scene Settings. under accurender. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. click Site. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Interior. as daylight sources. 8 Under Date. and click OK. and click Save. under Background Color. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. select Ground Plane. 20 In the Material Library.rvt. 4 Under Type. 22 Click OK twice. 17 In the Environment dialog box. double-click {3D}. 18 Under Advanced. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. 14 Click Save. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. You can select families with transparent materials. The Ground Plane tab displays. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. m_Cohouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter bo. under Scene Settings. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Rye. under Scene Settings. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. Dark.

2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. . click Raytrace. the following rendered view is displayed. click OK. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. begins. click Daylights. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Interior. which can take several minutes. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. The radiosity process. 7 On the Design Bar. When radiate completes. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . 5 On the Design Bar. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. click Radiate. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. Curtain Wall 1).

A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI.9 If you want to save your changes. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. elevation. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. click Save As. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. 10 Close the exercise file. but you can also define it in a 3D. The walkthrough path is a spline. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you must select or define a scene. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. on the File menu. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. or section view. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. In a plan view. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline.

Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. right-click in the Design Bar. click Walkthrough. and ends in the far corner of the living room. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 3 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the start point. or the first key frame. Open c_Townhouse. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. expand Views (all).You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse.rvt located in the Common folder. click Settings ➤ Project Units. If you prefer to use Metric values. and click the tab in the context menu. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and change unit formats as desired. and double-click 1st Floor. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. expand Floor Plans. proceeds through the dining room. click Open. of the walkthrough. click the Training Files icon. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise.

10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. and double-click Walkthrough 1. select the crop boundary. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. 11 Under Change. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 12 On the View menu. expand Walkthroughs. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. 9 On the Options Bar.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. and click OK. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and select the crop boundary. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify Field of view is selected. on the Options Bar. If it is not. click . The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region.

press ESC. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame).rvt. proceed to the next exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. 16 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough plays. c_Townhouse.13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 17 Click . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. click Edit Walkthrough. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. enter 1 for Frame. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 14 Click .

Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar.Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. clear Far Clip Active. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. double-click 1st Floor. select Path for Controls. click Edit Walkthrough. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. under Extents. and click OK. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can move any camera target or key frame position. 2 On the Options Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. click . 6 On the Options Bar.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. 8 If you want to save this exercise. select <Shading> for Display mode. to play the walkthrough. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . 4 Under Format. hidden line. shaded. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Edit Walkthrough. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. click Save As. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. under Walkthroughs. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. When you export the walkthrough. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. double-click Walkthrough 1. or with AccuRender raytracing. c_Townhouse. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. on the File menu. click Export ➤ AVI.7 Click the third key frame position. perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 2 In the Save As dialog box. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. specifying the number of frames. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. shaded with edges. reducing the size of the image. 9 On the Options Bar. and click Save. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. The AVI is recorded. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. 1 On the File menu. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 3 Under Output Length. Recording the Walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. If you are unsure of what option to use. specify 10 for Frames per Second.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

or the client. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. there are several options for expressing the architecture. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. For the realistic approach. Using the pre-built building model. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. sections. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. an outside reviewer. To express texture beyond material specifics. you explore the stylistic approach. Co-house. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents." In Revit Building. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. Whether the audience is the general contractor. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. In this series of exercises. In this tutorial. Advanced Model Graphics. length. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. type. and details." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. 491 . and Section Boxes. the Linework Tool. a consultant. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. elevations.

you create a copy of the plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Cohouse. click the Training Files icon.rvt located in the Metric folder. Cnst. you create a presentation floor plan. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. right-click 2nd Flr. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open.

and click Save. this represents the view getting smaller. and so on in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise.2 In the Project Browser.rvt. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . Notice the immediate change in the line weights. This turns off the visibility of all tags. expand the Stairs category. and click Rename. Using Advanced Model Graphics. 8 Click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 7 Under Visibility. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. elevations. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and Up Arrow. click Save As. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. UP Text. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. sections. dimensions. 11 In the Save As directory. click Visibility/Graphics. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. Notice that no annotations display in this view. Down Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. 10 On the File menu. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. navigate to the folder of your choice. Cnst. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. and click OK. and clear DOWN Text.

select By Date.rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. modify. and click OK. you can create. USA for City. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. specify 35 for Shadow. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. select Cast Shadows. double-click it in the Project Browser. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box.Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. Time and Place. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. under Sunlight Settings. click the Place tab. The higher the number. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click for Place. Under Shadows Properties. Under Intensity. the darker the shadows. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. 7 Select Boston. 2 On the View Control Bar. click . MA. Within a Project. At that place. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view.

NOTE For this step. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. you can enter any city you wish. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. 10 Click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. . under Sunlight Settings. be aware that if you enter a different city. 16 On the File menu. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click Save. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . for At Level. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. clear Ground Plane. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. however. Cnst. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click OK.

6 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. and click View. and notice a view title displays. click Sheet. select Arch Portrait. and click to place it. 7 Zoom in around the viewport.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. TIP If the View tab is not available. and click OK. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. click Modify. click Add View. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click the Design Bar. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 4 In the Views dialog box.

Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. To accomplish this. 12 In the Name dialog box. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Graphics. click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. select No for Show Title. For this analytique. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. click .Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. click Edit/New. and click OK.

and select Chain.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. click Filled Region. click . 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . fill properties. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. If necessary. select Invisible Lines. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. 18 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. click . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. and the boundary of the region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 17 In the Type Selector. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. and click Deactivate View. under Graphics. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. click Save. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. click Region Properties. When you are finished drawing the chain. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . and click OK. 33 On the File menu. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. and click Properties. 21 On the Design Bar. under Name. and click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. 24 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. under Identity Data. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Solid Fill. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Solid Black.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. click OK. scroll down.

under Views (all). expand Elevations.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Duplicate.rvt.

enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab. select Cast Shadows. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 8 Click OK. scroll up. right-click Copy of South. on the Model Categories tab. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. click Duplicate. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.2 In the Project Browser. click . specify 35 for Shadow. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 12 Under Intensity. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. 13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and clear Surface Pattern. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. and clear Elevation Swing. expand the Walls category. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. scroll down. and click Rename. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. under Elevations. 11 Under Shadow Properties. enter Presentation South Elevation. 6 Under Visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. By changing the angle of the sun. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . 15 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Visibility. under Sunlight Settings. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. expand the Doors category.

Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 3 In the Views dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Views (all). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand Sheets. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation.18 On the File menu.rvt.Presentation. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Add View. and click Add View to Sheet. and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. click Save.

Notice the view title no longer displays. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 .Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Viewport: Presentation. 5 In the Type Selector.

You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique. 7 On the Design Bar. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 8 On the File menu.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 On the Options Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 4 Add the section shown below. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . click Section. under Floor Plans.rvt. select 1: 100 for Scale.

8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Callout. expand Sections (Callout 1). To accomplish this. and double-click Section 2. To fit correctly in the analytique. select 1: 100 for Scale. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. and clear Surface Pattern. expand the Walls category. 12 In the Project Browser. 16 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. double-click Presentation Section 2. scroll up. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Presentation Section 2. and click Rename. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . right-click Callout of Section 2. and clear Elevation Swing. scroll down. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). under Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. 15 Under Visibility.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. expand the Doors category. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. under Sections (Callout 1). 10 In the Project Browser.

21 On the Options Bar.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 19 Click OK. Notice the crop region no longer displays. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View. clear Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 23 On the File menu. click Save. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary.

rvt. open the Project Browser and. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. select Relative to View. and click OK. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Directly. Under Intensity. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. and click OK. Click Apply. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. 5 In the Name dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Duplicate. click . Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. under Sections (Callout 1). specify 35 for Shadow. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Apply. under Sunlight Settings. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . In the steps that follow. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Under Shadows Properties. double-click Presentation Section 2. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. In addition. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast.

was added to this dataset for training purposes. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. select Override Silhouettes. NOTE The line style. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. under Silhouette Edges. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. and click OK. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. click Save. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 10 On the File menu. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu. Silhouette Edges. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.

click Add View. under Sheets (all). 3 In the Views dialog box. 5 In the Type Selector.Presentation.rvt. and click to place the selected view. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . 6 On the Design Bar. select Section: Presentation Section 2. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 .Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Viewport: Presentation. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet. The view title no longer displays. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. double-click Section 2.Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. under Sections (Callout 1). you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. click . Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. Using a clock as a reference. To rotate an object. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you click to specify the start radius. and press ENTER. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 9 On the Edit toolbar. In the steps that follow. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned.Presentation. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter.

Working with a Presentation View Template. and drag it up and to the left as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. click Save.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 16 On the File menu. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. click Modify. 514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . After applying the view template to a new section view. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet.

Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. click OK. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. under Sections (Type 1). 7 In the Rename View dialog box. Now. and click Duplicate. enter Presentation. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. right-click Section 1. 6 In the Project Browser. click Apply View Template. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 In the New View Template dialog box. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the View menu.rvt. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. double-click Presentation Section 2. click Save as View Template. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click Rename. enter Presentation Section 1. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

and click Activate View. and click OK. 16 On the View menu. under Graphics. click View Properties. select Section: Presentation Section 1. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Presentation. and elevation swings no longer display. and click Deactivate View. click Add View. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. lighting fixtures. and click Add View to Sheet. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click A105 . 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Presentation. 14 In the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). Notice the furniture. 15 Right-click the viewport. you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select Viewport: Presentation. and click OK. annotations. 12 In the Views dialog box.

click Save. Working in a Callout Analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . In this exercise.20 On the File menu. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or column capital.

m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. click Modify. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select the callout. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under Sections (Callout 1).rvt. enter Presentation Callout. click Callout. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. After you add the callout. double-click Section 1. 4 In the Project Browser.

This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout. clear Crop Region Visible. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Right-click. under Extents. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . and click View Properties.6 In the Project Browser.

select Viewport: Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. and click Activate View.Presentation. double-click A105 . click Add View. 15 On the Design Bar. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 14 In the Type Selector. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. select Custom for View Scale. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 17 On the View menu. and click OK. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. click Modify. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 12 In the Views dialog box. select Section: Presentation Callout. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. and move it into the position shown below.

22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. click Filled Region. In the steps that follow. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. under Sections (Callout 1). 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Solid Black for Type. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. click Region Properties. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below.NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. When finished. double-click Presentation Callout. and make adjustments as necessary. and click OK. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 23 On the Design Bar. activate the viewport. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base.

click . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Presentation. 29 On the Options Bar. and click Activate View. and sketch the rectangle shown below.26 On the Project Browser. click Filled Region. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

and click OK. click View Properties. select Crop Region Visible. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 31 On the View menu. 33 Select the crop region. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . click Finish Sketch. under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

and click OK. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 On the File menu. under Extents. click Save.34 On the View menu. click View Properties. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. clear Crop Region Visible. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click Advanced Model Graphics.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. and click 1: 200.rvt. 2 On the View menu. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. double-click Isometric. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click the Scale control. under 3D Views. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 3 On the View Control Bar. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar.s and apply shadows to the views. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . click Orient ➤ Southwest. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway.

13 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Duplicate. under 3D Views. and click Rename. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. select Section Box. and click OK. Select Relative to View. and click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. and click Rename. specify 35 for Shadow. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. Cnst. click . Under Shadows Properties. double-click Isometric 2. and click OK. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Select 1st Flr. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. under Sunlight Settings. and click OK. Under Intensity. 18 On the View menu. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. enter Isometric 2. 7 In the Name dialog box. under 3D Views. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. enter Isometric 1. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . select Override Silhouettes. select Cast Shadows. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. click Duplicate. under 3D Views. for At Level. 9 Click OK. 14 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. right-click Isometric 1. right-click Isometric. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Select Ground Plane. and click OK. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Extents.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. under Silhouette Edges.

and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown.20 Select the section box. When you are finished. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. You can use this to rotate the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . These allow you to modify the extents of the section box.

30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. 25 In the Project Browser. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. click Modify on the Design Bar. and click Rename. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. 23 In the Project Browser. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Crop Region. under 3D Views. select Crop Region. the stairs and railings may display. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. 26 On the View menu. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. enter Isometric 3. double-click Isometric 2. double-click Isometric 3. and click OK. click View Properties. click View Properties. either adjust the plane location. Notice the section box no longer displays. 29 Select the section box. under Extents. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . under 3D Views. under 3D Views. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. make a copy of the view. clear Crop Region Visible. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 31 On the View menu. 22 In the Project Browser.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. and click OK. under 3D Views. When you are finished. In such a case. and click Duplicate. and click OK.

drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . under 3D Views.Next. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector. double-click A105 . under Sheets (all). 36 In the Project Browser. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and.Presentation. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. in the Type Selector. select Viewport: Presentation. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 34 In the Project Browser. 35 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser.

click Lines. 39 On the Design Bar. click Edit. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 43 On the Design Bar. select Concrete for Type. and then click Edit/New. and click Activate View. and on the Options Bar. 42 Click OK twice. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 38 Select the poche filled region. This will make it easier to draw lines. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. under Graphics. select Transparent for Background. click Region Properties.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. The image below shows the lines redrawn. 44 Using the drawing tools. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you add it to the presentation sheet. and click OK. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. a cutaway perspective view.45 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . 47 On the Design Bar. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. select Solid Black for Type. and click Deactivate View. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. 49 On the File menu. click Save.

532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . The view opens immediately.rvt. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Camera. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. Cnst. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. then you specify the eye direction and range. double-click 1st Flr. under Floor Plans.

click .4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Override Silhouettes. Under Shadows Properties. and click Advanced Model Graphics. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. Under Intensity. 5 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. and click OK. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. under Silhouette Edges. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. specify 35 for Shadow. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . 9 Under Silhouette Edges. and click OK.

11 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. 12 Select the section box.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. select Section Box. Notice the controls that display on each plane. and click OK. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. click View Properties. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.

click View Properties.Presentation. you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. click Size. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . under Change. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). under 3D Views. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 17 Under Size. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. 18 On the View menu. under Sheets (all). under Extents. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 165 mm for Width. and click OK. clear Crop Region Visible. 15 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Project Browser. After placing it.14 Select the crop boundary. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown.

under Text. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click Duplicate. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Save. click Text. 9 In the Name dialog box. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.22 On the File menu. select a font. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .rvt. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter Title. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Edit/New. enter Description. 5 In the Name dialog box. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the same font as the title. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. click . specify a text size of 40 mm. under Text. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify a text size of 6 mm. click Duplicate. select Title. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.

16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. select Description. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 On the Design Bar. 18 On the File menu. click Save. 15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 .

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

shape. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. thus the term family. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. material set. In this tutorial. they are still related and come from a single source. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. each with a different size. 539 .

you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. has wall types that define interior. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. Walls. however. exterior.rfa extension. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. The basic walls system family. and when and how to use it. Using the Family Editor. exceptions to this rule. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . For example. generic. and roofs are examples of these types of families. This makes file management much easier. and roofs. and partition wall styles. In addition. because there is only one file to track. for example. while many more are stored in component libraries. You also learn about the Family Editor. floors.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. but you cannot create new system families. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. In this lesson. foundation. such as a dome roof. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. There are. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . floors. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file.

and save them from a project file to your library if needed. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. transfer them from one project to another. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. custom wall treatments. You create in-place families only within the current project. The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. and also a standalone furniture family component. You can load them into projects. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. for example. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . and furniture. Standalone families include columns.rfa extension. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. trees.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.

When the family opens. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. and click Open. In this exercise. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you can double-click any file with an . or you can load it using the Load From Library. such as plan. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . To start a new family. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. elevation. you learn when to use the Family Editor. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. you can click File ➤ Open. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. select the appropriate template.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. and click Open. it opens within the Family Editor. navigate to a family file. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 3 Next. In this section. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. it is saved with the project. Within the Windows® environment. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. In the final exercise. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. After the family has been loaded in the project. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. and when to use it. With Revit Building open. you learn about the Family Editor. In this case. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. 2 On the File menu. If you find a close match. such as newsgroups. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. Load Family command on the File menu. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. how to access it. consider checking the web library and other web resources. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. it should be available within the Type Selector. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family.rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. modify it as needed. how to access it. To add a family to your project. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. or 3D. However. you can drag it into the document window. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. and then load it into the project. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. presume it is a bay window that you require. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. if you have exhausted your external resources. 5 Finally. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. if you change the original family. open it in the Family Editor.

3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. 9 Save the newly-defined family. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 .General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

In addition. you create an in-place family.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. not within the Family Editor. a lighting fixture. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you learn how to create a different type of component. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. In each lesson. When you create an in-place family. 545 . You create a furniture family. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families. you create it within the project file. and several annotation families. Using the installed templates.

Creating a Door Family In this lesson. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . height. The door type has a variable height and width. and thickness. Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively.

this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. Floor Plan: Ref. and click Open. and represent the door opening profile. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Creating a Door Family | 547 . Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. Notice the four tiled views. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Doors [projection]. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Symbolic Lines. Level. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 4 On the View menu. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 5 On the Window menu.rft. Labelled dimensions. part of the door properties. 6 Maximize the window. are also displayed. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. 10 On the Options Bar. click . 9 In the Type Selector. 7 Enter ZF.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. click New ➤ Family. click Tile. Select Metric Door. 2 On the File menu.

click Dimension. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar.

19 On the Options Bar. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. select Width for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. Creating a Door Family | 549 . Because labelled dimensions are parameters. 17 On the Options Bar. click Modify.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. select Thickness for Label.

TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the image below.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. then you specify each end point. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. click the down arrow button. and select the command from the menu. you first specify the arc center. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. click Symbolic Lines. 21 On the Design Bar. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 22 In the Type selector. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. 24 Enter SI. select Plan Swing [cut]. along with the witness line controls. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. 23 On the Options Bar. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. click . the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point.

and click . and click OK. click Lines. 3 On the Design Bar. under Elevations.1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. enter 50 mm for Depth. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 551 . 8 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Finish Sketch. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. double-click Left. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click Exterior.

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. double-click Ref. 14 In the Project Browser. select Thickness for Label. under Floor Plans.10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. Level. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. click Modify and select the dimension. then click to specify the dimension witness line. 13 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Design Bar.

3 In the New Material dialog box. under Name. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. Left/Right. Medium. click Modify. and click OK. Creating a Door Family | 553 . click OK. click for Texture. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. select Panel for Subcategory.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. and Fine are selected. click . you assign a material to the door leaf.No Gloss. select Front/Back. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. and click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. select Oak Door. 19 Under Detail Levels. enter Oak Door for Name.Red/Stained. and clear Plan/RCP. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click Visibility. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. verify that Coarse. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. 9 On the Options Bar. 6 Click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. for Material. under View Specific Display. 7 In the Materials dialog box.Dark. under AccuRender. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Materials. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. and click OK. 13 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Materials dialog box. click Duplicate. click OK.

under Views (all). The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and click OK. click OK. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. select Oak Door for Name. and select Shading with Edges. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. click the Model Graphics Style control. click . under 3D Views. 21 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .15 On the Options Bar. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. for Material.

Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2500 mm for Height. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 .The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. click Family Types. By flexing the new component. Under Other. 27 Click OK. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. Click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Under Other. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. 24 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Height. Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project.

Click Apply. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. Training Door. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. 5 Under Family Types. and click OK. Enter 925 mm for Width. click New. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Save. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Enter 750 mm for Width. select Project. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click OK. click Family Types. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. click New ➤ Project. 11 Click OK. Click Apply. verify that DefaultMetric. 17 On the Options Bar. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click Wall. 9 In the Name dialog box. click New. enter 2000 mm for Height.rfa. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Door. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. Click Apply. Enter 1220 mm for Width. 4 In the Family Types dialog box.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 3 In the Name dialog box. enter 2134 mm for Height. 556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Under Family Types. under Family Types. Define the third new door type. Training Door. and click Open. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. under Template file. Under Create new. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click OK. 15 In the New Project dialog box. click Load.rte is the Template file. 18 In the Open dialog box. Define the second new door type. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. select it. 6 In the Name dialog box.rfa. enter 2100 mm for Height.

27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown. 22 On the View Control Bar. 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click . click the Model Graphics Style control.21 On the View toolbar. 26 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 24 In the Type Selector. and select Shading with Edges. Creating a Door Family | 557 . select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 23 On the Design Bar. click Door.

glazing and mullions as extrusions.28 In the Type Selector. height. 30 You can close all files without saving. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. This completes the lesson. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. and specify values for the window width. Creating a Door Family. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. and mullion offset. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . default sill height. Finally. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. You create the window frame. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. and create the window sash as a sweep.

rft. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. you specify the parameters for the new window family. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. are also displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. part of the window properties. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. 4 On the Window menu. The window type has a variable height and width. Four views are tiled on your display. Creating a Window Family | 559 . 5 On the View menu. The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 2 On the File menu. Select Metric Window. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view. Labelled dimensions. 7 Enter ZF. and click Open. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. equally spaced vertical mullions. click Tile. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.

Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. When you add labels to dimensions. Click Apply. is one of the type parameters. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. enter 1300 mm for Height. This process is called “flexing the model. click Family Types. Change the height and width values again. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. This is the starting point for the new window.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. Height and Default Sill Height. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. The label name. 12 Click OK. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. then sketching the sweep profile. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. and click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. also one of the window properties.

click Sketch Profile. and specify an offset of 50 mm. select Elevation: Right. click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar. and click Open View. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. Snap the cursor to each corner. click . 12 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. click the Scale control. 6 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10. click Sketch 2D Path. click Finish Path. Creating a Window Family | 561 . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. click . 9 On the View Control Bar.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar.

and select the reference plane. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 20 On the Options Bar. under Identity Data. and click OK.14 On the Design Bar. click . 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Sash for the Name. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Prefer: Wall faces. 23 On the Options Bar. select Chain and click . click Modify. and select the dimension. 15 On the Options Bar. click Lines. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. click Dimension. 17 On the Design Bar. 24 Below the red dot.

and drag it to the interior face of the wall. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. the exact dimensions are not critical. click Modify. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. However. When the lock displays. 25 On the Design Bar. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section. Creating a Window Family | 563 .NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps.

click Dimension. 29 On the Design Bar. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click it to lock the line to the reference plane. and specify the dimension value.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. When the lock displays. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. as shown. click Modify. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. select the line you want to move. TIP After adding the dimension.

Creating a Window Family | 565 . When the lock displays. 35 On the Design Bar. 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. If necessary. 36 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sweep. under Views (all). spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. When the lock displays. expand 3D Views.Modify each dimension if necessary. 37 In the Project Browser. click . click the lock to constrain the present value. zoom out until it displays. 32 Select the 20 mm dimension. Next. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. 33 On the Tools toolbar. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. and double-click View 1. Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click Finish Profile. this is the top of the window opening. click the lock to constrain the present value.

5 On the Options Bar. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box.38 In the Project Browser. click . Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. under Specify a new Work Plane. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. under Elevations. and select Lock. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. and select the option.45 mm for Depth. Chain of walls or lines. and click OK. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. and enter . click Lines. double-click Exterior. click Set Work Plane.

You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. Creating a Window Family | 567 . and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle.50 mm for Offset. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle.The entire sash outline is selected. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. Enter . set the following options: ■ ■ Click . ■ Click . and lock icons display on each line.

12 Proceed to the next exercise.9 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. click Finish Sketch. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane.

double-click Right. click Ref Plane. click . you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. and enter 30 mm for Offset. as shown. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. 3 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 569 .

6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane.5 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

7 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 9 On the Options Bar. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. double-click Exterior. and click OK. and click OK. enter 12 mm for Depth. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. click . 8 Select the reference plane. under Identity Data. 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click to create the glass boundary. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Specify a new Work Plane. and select Lock. click Lines. under Elevations. click Set Work Plane. 16 On the Options Bar.

22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . sash. 23 On the Design Bar. click . After the family is loaded into a project. 21 On the Options Bar. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. View the window model with frame. double-click Right. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion.18 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. click Modify. and click OK. under Elevations. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. double-click View 1. 24 In the Project Browser.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Under Other. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. Under Other. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height. Click Apply. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. NOTE After flexing the model. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. For example. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 1500 mm for Height.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. Enter 1500 mm for Width. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Creating a Window Family | 573 . You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Click OK.

Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. the exact location is not critical. under Elevations. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. After adding the dimension. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. click Ref Plane. double-click Exterior.

9 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. click Modify. as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar. as shown.> for Label. Creating a Window Family | 575 . Do not be concerned with dimension values.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it.. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it.. Do not be concerned with dimension values.

10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions. 14 Click the dimension value. enter Mullion Offset for Name. click Family Types. Click OK. under Dimensions. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. click Modify. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. 11 On the Design Bar. Select Instance. Under Group parameter under. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Family parameter. and click OK. and enter 350 mm as the new value. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. 12 In the Family Types dialog box.

22 On the Design Bar. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. enter 14 mm for Depth. 23 On the Options Bar. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. As you did before. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. click Lines. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. However. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Window Family | 577 . 18 On the Design Bar. After you complete the sketch.17 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. click Modify. under Specify a new Work Plane. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. select Mullion Offset for Label. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. 20 On the Design Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. and click . 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Set Work Plane. move the dimension value as shown.

select <Add parameter> for Label.26 On the Design Bar. Move the dimension values as shown. click Modify. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 29 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.

■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. enter Mullion Width for Name. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Under Group parameter under. Remember. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Click OK. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. select Family parameter. Select the dimension. This is changed in later steps. 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Under Parameter Data. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Dimensions. select Mullion Width for Label. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. 33 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 579 . Select Type. and on the Options Bar.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. or undoing the same. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . evenly spaced. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. and aligned with the sash edge. In this case. click Family Types. enter 1500 mm for Height. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. Click Apply. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. NOTE After flexing the model.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Click OK. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Under Other. 44 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Dimension. 39 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box.37 In the Family Types dialog box. 41 On the Design Bar. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 46 On the Design Bar. click . enter 1000 mm for Height. and click OK. 42 On the Options Bar. Enter 2000 mm for Width. click Lines. as shown. click Set Work Plane. click Dimension.

click Finish Sketch. and on the Options Bar. select Mullion Width for Label. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. Select the dimension.48 On the Design Bar. Remember. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. 49 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Mullion Width for Label. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. Move the dimension value as shown.

click Family Types. 56 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 583 . Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. under 3D Views. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. click Join Geometry. 54 In the Project Browser. 53 Select the horizontal mullions. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and select the vertical mullions. If necessary.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. you can still see the window. double-click View 1.

you assign materials to the frame. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. enter 1000 mm for Height.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. Click Apply. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width. sash. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Under Other. Click OK. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Under Other. 59 Proceed to the next exercise.

Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Materials. under AccuRender. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. select Stained. and select Shading with Edges. Dark. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click for Texture. double-click Exterior. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. Yellow/. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. enter Pine Frame for Name. click Duplicate. click the Model Graphics Style control. 8 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. 9 Select the window frame sweep. and click OK. and the mullions. 2 In the Materials dialog box. 3 In the New Material dialog box. sash. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. click OK. 4 In the Materials dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 585 . No Gloss. the sash. under Elevations.

23 Under Detail Levels. and click OK. under View Specific Display. 18 On the Design Bar. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. clear the other view options. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). and Fine are selected. double-click View 1. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Right. 21 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under View Specific Display. under 3D Views. and Fine are selected. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 Under Detail Levels. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). Medium. verify that Coarse. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Identity Data.10 On the Options Bar. Medium. 13 In the Materials dialog box. select Edit for Visibility. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Modify. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and click OK. click Visibility. click for Material. click OK. 24 In the Project Browser. and click OK. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. select Pine Frame for Name. verify that Coarse. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. under Graphics. click . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Creating a Window Family | 587 . 26 Proceed to the next exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. mullions. Defining New Window Types. The window frame. sash. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. Defining New Window Types In this exercise.25 Zoom in on a window corner. and glass display their assigned materials.

2 On the Design Bar. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. click Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Height. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. 3 In the Family Types dialog box. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK.

8 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. click New. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. under Family Types.The window height is doubled. and click OK. and click OK. 9 Under Family Types. click New. 7 In the Name dialog box. enter 1000 mm for Height. and click Apply. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Creating a Window Family | 589 . Click Apply. Enter 1250 mm for Height. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog box.

click to start a new project based on your default template. Enter 1500 mm for Height. click Load. Enter 1300 mm for Height. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. click Thin Lines. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 13 In the Name dialog box. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 20 In the Open dialog box. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply.rfa file. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 33 Zoom in on the center window. 25 In the Type Selector. 24 On the Options Bar. Notice the detail that displays. 19 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. Training Window. 15 On the File menu. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You now have three new window types defined within your window family. click Save. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK.11 In the Family Types dialog box. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Design Bar. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 23 On the Design Bar.rfa. click New. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. click Window. click Wall. click Modify. click Window. Click Apply. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. select it. 32 On the View menu. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 29 In the Type Selector. clear Tag on Placement. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 27 In the Type Selector. Click OK. and click Open. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall.

you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. 35 On the View Control Bar. and drawers as extrusions. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. and specify values for the furniture length and depth.34 On the View toolbar. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. You begin by creating the desktop. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. click . and select Shading with Edges. click the Model Graphics Style control. Finally. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. drawer base. rolltop. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 .

you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. click Ref Plane. Select Metric Furniture. 5 On the View menu. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Floor Plan: Ref. 9 On the Design Bar. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 On the Design Bar. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. they represent the furniture centerline axes. 4 Maximize the view. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. and click Open. their exact location is not critical. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click New ➤ Family. Level. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Dimension. 2 On the File menu.rft.

click Modify. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 12 On the Design Bar.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . as shown. 13 Select the left reference plane. It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. and ending at the right reference plane.

594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. as shown. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. click Dimension. as shown.15 On the Design Bar. and ending at the lower reference plane.

21 On the Design Bar. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. horizontal reference plane. 19 Select the upper. click Modify. Afterwards. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . TIP To do this. click Modify.18 On the Design Bar.

27 On the Options Bar.> for Label. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select <Add parameter... select Dimensions. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. Select Type. select <Add parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.. select Family parameter. Select Type. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. For Group parameter under. Click OK.. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. enter Depth for Name.23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Family parameter. select Dimensions. enter Length for Name. 24 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. For Group parameter under.

33 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. click Family Types. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 . so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. 30 On the Design Bar. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Therefore. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click Apply. it will also adapt to the same changes. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes.These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. enter 3000 mm for Length. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. 32 In the Family Types dialog box.

598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. NOTE In the image below. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. Your lines may have a lighter weight. click Lines. 11 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 8 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click to select all four symbolic lines. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. Level for Name. click Finish Sketch. click . 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Front. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane. 10 On the Design Bar. click Symbolic Lines. click . 7 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. and enter 100 mm for Depth. select Level: Ref. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes.

22 On the Options Bar. select <Add parameter. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop.. click Modify. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop.. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. as shown. 12 On the Design Bar. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop.> for Label. click Modify. and select the top edge. and select the bottom edge. click Dimension. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar.

select Dimensions. Select Type. and click Apply.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Select Type. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. Click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click Apply. 27 On the Design Bar. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.> for Label. select Family parameter. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. enter Height for Name. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. enter 4000 mm for Length. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. you can still see the model. For Group parameter under. For Group parameter under. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and click Apply. Under Parameter Data. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. click Modify. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 1200 mm for Height.. select Dimensions. and click Apply. select <Add parameter. Click OK. click Family Types. enter Thickness for Name.. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data.

under Floor Plans. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 6 On the Design Bar. and enter 100 mm for Offset. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. double-click Ref. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. Click the lock icon as shown. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Level. click . 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Ref Plane.

click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click OK. click Lines. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. select Level: Ref. 10 On the Design Bar.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. Lock the dimension as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. Level for Name. as shown. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. two lock icons display. click Dimension.After you complete the rectangle. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. 16 On the Design Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.

18 On the Design Bar. . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. click the Mirror tool. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. 20 On the Tools toolbar. as shown below at the cursor. using the TAB key. click Modify. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 23 For the align-to reference. 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 22 On the Tools toolbar. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 19 Select the four sketched lines. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. A lock icon displays. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 26 On the Design Bar.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base.

select Family parameter. click Modify. Select Type. Under Parameter Data. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base..> for Label. select <Add parameter.28 Add two final dimensions. Click OK.. as shown. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 33 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select Dimensions. 34 On the Design Bar. select Drawer Base Width for Label. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. For Group parameter under. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

35 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click it to lock the alignment. After the alignment. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 . 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. under Elevations. 37 On the Tools toolbar. a lock icon displays. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. click .

45 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1200 mm for Height. 41 On the View toolbar. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. click Modify. 47 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Enter 750 mm for Height.40 On the Design Bar. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 42 On the View menu. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. enter 2000 mm for Length. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. you can still see the model. enter 4000 mm for Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry. and click Apply. click the Scale control and select 1:20. However. click . Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. notice that annotations display in this view. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 3 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. under Elevations. 6 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click to specify the upper left corner. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click . click Lines. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 5 On the Design Bar. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. as shown. double-click Right.

and lock the alignment. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines.8 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Design Bar. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line. and lock it. then the lower horizontal sketch line. click . 9 Select the desk top. click Dimension. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion.

13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. the upper sketch line. 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . click the Fillet arc tool. click Lines. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. . The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button.

select the left edge of the rolltop. select the right edge of the rolltop. 612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. double-click Front. under Elevations. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. click .

and click Apply. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. click Family Types. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . and click Apply. click . 24 In the Family Types dialog box.21 On the View toolbar. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. and click Apply. you can still see the model. and click Apply. enter 4000 mm for Length. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. You can also use dimension constraints. 23 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

notice that there is only one view available. select Training Files. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. In the left pane of the New dialog box. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. Select Generic Annotation. The new room tag is now ready for use. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. select Ceiling Finish. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rft. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click Open. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. and click OK. select Area.

Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. click . click Lines. 3 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

14 In the Object Styles dialog box. click New. select 3 for Line Weight. under Modify Subcategories. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Modify. in the North Line row. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. select North Line. click Modify. click Modify. The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . and click OK. 16 In the Type Selector. 17 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. enter North Line for Name. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. and click OK. 10 On the Design Bar. and select the upper vertical line. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Object Styles.

select Training Files. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 8 In the Open dialog box. select it. click Browse. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. click Modify. 7 On the File menu. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 5 Click OK.18 Select the template notes and press DELETE.rte file. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog box. select A1 metric. click OK. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click New ➤ Project.rfa. Select the DefaultMetric. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. 12 On the Design Bar. Training North Arrow. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.rfa. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 10 In the Type Selector. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. In the New Project Dialog box. click Symbol. and click Open. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. select Training North Arrow. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Sheet. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson.

select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. graphics. You customize the titleblock with a new text style.rft. Select A0 metric. text.The titleblock has linework. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and enter -25 for Offset. click New ➤ Titleblock. and click Open. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. 3 On the Options Bar. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. and labels. click . you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. and your project data.

638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to draw a new vertical line. and enter 140 for Offset. click . . 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. and click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 7 On the Options Bar. 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. click 8 Enter 0 for Offset.

19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. 21 On the Options Bar. press CTRL. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line.12 On the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. click . and enter 20 for Offset. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . enter 30 for Offset. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. click Modify. click Lines. 15 On the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 17 On the Options Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 16 In the Type Selector. select Title Blocks. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.

2 In the Open dialog box. click Import/Link ➤ Image. navigate to Training Files/Common.25 On the Design Bar. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. and labels to your titleblock. text notes. select Company Logo. The titleblock linework is now complete. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. you add a company logo. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .jpg. click Modify. and click Open.

click Text. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. in the text box. enter 10mm Bold for Name. and click OK. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Click OK twice. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. under Text. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. click . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and select Bold. click Duplicate. click Edit/New.4 Zoom in on the logo. 9 In the Name dialog box. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. enter 10 for Text Size.

and drag the text note down as shown. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 18 Select the drag handle. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. select Text : 8mm. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. and add an address and phone number as shown. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. and select the last text note. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. click Text. address. Add consultant name.

22 On the Design Bar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. 24 On the Options Bar. 23 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . click Modify. and select the consultant text note. select Constrain and Multiple. click . 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

enter 5 for Text Size. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Name dialog box. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and click OK. click . 41 On the Options Bar. and click OK. select Text : 5mm. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. under Text. and enter Date:. and click to specify the label location. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . 34 Click OK twice. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. and enter Checked By:. select Project Issue Date. enter 5mm for Name. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. click Text. and enter Drawn By:. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Label.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Sheet Number:. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment.

47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Drawn By. 45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Checked By and click OK. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .44 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.

click . 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click OK. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. click Center and Middle. 50 On the Options Bar. select Label : 15mm Label. under Text. and click to specify the label location. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . 54 In the Type Properties dialog box.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. enter 15mm Label for Name. select Sheet Number. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. 62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 55 Click OK twice. and click to specify the label location. click Label. click Edit/New. 59 On the Options Bar. 53 In the Name dialog box. click Duplicate. and click OK. select Project Number. enter 15 for Text Size. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Label.63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 70 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. enter 4 for Text Size. and click OK. click Duplicate. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. 75 Click OK twice. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click Edit/New. 73 In the Name dialog box. and click to specify the label location. under Text. select Project Name. click . enter 4mm Label. select Client Name. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK.

6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Training Files. select File Path. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. click Sheet. and click OK. In the New Project Dialog box. The titleblock graphics. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click OK. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select it. click Modify. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and labels are now complete. click Left and Middle. 77 On the Options Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . and click Open. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. click Load. click Browse. 80 On the Design Bar. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. select 4mm Label. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder.rfa file. Select the DefaultMetric. and click Open. and click to specify the label location.rfa. 7 Click OK.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. 5 In the Open dialog box. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. click New ➤ Project. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. 2 In the New Project dialog box. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. text.rte file.

click Modify and select the titleblock. and click OK. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 14 Click OK. under Other. Enter In Progress for Project Status. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. Enter Office Building for Project Name. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. click . enter Name for Drawn By. 12 On the Settings menu. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Project Information. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 2005 for Project Issue Date.

and click Open. click Orient ➤ Southeast. expand Elevations.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 In the Project Browser. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. click Open. and set the suffix to None. To change the units of measurement to meters. on the Settings menu. click Project Units. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. Next. Set the Length units to millimeters. Select c_Pantheon. expand Views (all). select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. Creating In-Place Families | 651 .NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and double-click South. set the Area to Square meters.

and click OK. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. enter Dome for Name. select Pick a Plane. click Create. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. and click Open View. click Set Work Plane. click Axis. and click OK. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. select Roofs for Family Category. select Section: Wall Section .Center. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar.Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. 7 On the Design Bar. click . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. The center wall section view is displayed. 5 In the Name dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

15 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor out. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. click Lines. click . 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point.Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. Creating In-Place Families | 653 .

Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. and select Chain. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. 19 On the Options Bar. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. click . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.

click . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 23 On the Options Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 27 On the Options Bar. Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. click Lines. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . select Delete Inner Segment.

33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. 32 On the Options Bar. click and select Chain. click Lines. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar.

click OK. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. click Finish Family. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . click . click . 40 On the Design Bar. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. select Concrete . 42 On the View toolbar. The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 41 On the Design Bar. click for Material. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Sketch. 35 Select the interior face of the wall. and click OK. 38 In the Materials dialog box.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. under Materials and Finishes.

click Axis. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. click . and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane.Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. enter Concave Floor for Name. and click Open View. 3 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. and click OK. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. double-click South. select Floors for Family Category. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. click Create. select Section: Wall Section . 7 In the Work Plane dialog box.Center. 6 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. select Pick a Plane.

click . Creating In-Place Families | 659 . 15 Specify the intersection of the T. and select Chain. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.O. 14 On the Options Bar. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown.12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. Footing level line and the axis. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. for the start point of the floor profile as shown.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Revolution Properties. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. click for Material. select Cobblestone for Name. Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. and click OK. 22 In the Materials dialog box. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views.O. 25 On the Design Bar. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T.O. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. double-click 3D Section View.18 Specify the intersection of the T. The concave floor closed profile is now complete.

not specifically how to make a floor truss. 661 . you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. you will understand the process. assigned subcatecories. formula-based parameters. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. and detail level controls.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. In this case. In exercises that become increasingly complex. methodology. During this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss. The truss also has multiple types. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. At the end of this tutorial. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building.

It should also be an available option within a beam system. Take this into consideration during your design planning. In addition. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. For training purposes. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. Two types should be created. beams. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. this must be a structural beam component. NOTE When creating a new family. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. and structural walls. In this case. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Although this solution is possible. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. a generic floor-based component might work. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. In this lesson. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. In this case. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. you should avoid over-designing the component. In the next exercise. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. For every complexity added to a family. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it is an open-joist wood floor truss. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. and also works intuitively with them. you determine the requirements of the new component. it is not the best solution. This decision dictates which family template you begin with.

only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. would require Instance or Type parameters. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. such as wood type. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. In the previous exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ.■ What materials need the most control? These materials. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. In addition. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. Depending on the family you are designing. Selecting the Family Template. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise.

Like most generic family templates. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing . it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). Select it so that the preview displays. If you are not in this folder.Complex and Trusses.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.Complex and Trusses. 5 In the New dialog box. ■ Metric Structural Framing . navigate to it.rft. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. For training purposes. notice the preview.Beams and Braces.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. 3 In the New dialog box. Because of its simplicity. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. There are two structural framing templates provided. On the right side of the New dialog box.Beams and Braces. This template is the best starting point for the new family. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. spacing. 4 In the New dialog box. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. ■ Metric Structural Framing . In addition.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. select Metric Generic Model floor based. and notice the preview. scroll to the structural framing templates. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing .rft and notice the preview. do not open this template.rft. for example: wall based or floor based. Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. scroll through the various template options. and display functions required by structural beams. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial.

under 3D Views. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. Therefore. however. double-click View 1. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. Level. 12 In the Project Browser. Floor Plan: Ref. 11 In the Project Browser. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. you add the reference planes. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. Floor Plan: Ref. Creating the Component Skeleton.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. lines.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point.Beams and Braces. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. Level In this view. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . double-click Front. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. click the Training Files icon. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . 10 Maximize the view. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Like many templates. under Elevations.

TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. In the project plan view image below. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. In the image below. you add reference planes to the beam design. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. Level. double-click Ref. notice the location of the beam extents. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. under Floor Plans. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. Reference Plane: Left. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane.

7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). In a later exercise. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. click Ref Plane. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. click .■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference planes. Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 .

You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Level as the mirror axis. Level. double-click Front. 10 On the Design Bar. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. To do this. click Ref Plane. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Add ref. under Elevations. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. Level.8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click on the Edit toolbar. and select the Level: Ref.

18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. and specify an Offset of 38 mm.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. click Ref Plane. 13 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar. click to place it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click to place it as shown. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton. click . click to place it as shown. click to place it as shown.

click to place it as shown. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. specify an Offset of 238 mm.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. Level. specify an Offset of 200 mm. under Floor Plans. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. 22 On the Options Bar. Before you move on to the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. click to place it as shown. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). 19 On the Options Bar. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. which you do in the next exercise. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Ref. 24 In the Project Browser.

Make sure you remember where you saved it. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.25 On the Design Bar. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. and click Save. 28 In the Save As dialog box. click Dimension. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. Wood Floor Truss. click Modify. After adding the dimension. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.rfa. click . navigate to the folder of your choice. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it. 2 On the Options Bar.

place the dimension to the left as shown. the Center reference plane. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. Level. under Elevations. Place the dimension as shown. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . double-click Front. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 6 On the Design Bar. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane.4 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and the lower horizontal reference plane. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. click Dimension. click Dimension. 9 On the Design Bar.

and place it below the dimension you added previously. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 .11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. add two dimensions as shown. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model.

under Floor Plans. consider making it a type parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Wood Floor Truss. Creating New Length Parameters. you will add additional reference planes. 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 Add four dimensions as shown. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Throughout the tutorial. and constraints as needed. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. it becomes a parameter. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. dimensions. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Level. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. double-click Ref. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. If the component has material that varies per component. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family.rfa. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. When you design a new family. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. consider making it a type parameter. In the next exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. In addition. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. consider making it an instance parameter. In this exercise. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project.

under Elevations. select Family parameter. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Under Parameter Data. enter Chord Width for Name. enter Depth for Name. Click OK. Under Parameter Data. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. double-click Front. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. Click OK. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. select Family parameter.

10 On the Options Bar. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Add parameter for Label. Under Parameter Data. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Click OK. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 13 On the Options Bar. Select Type. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. enter Chord Thickness for Name. Click OK. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. select Family parameter. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. Select Type.

Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. select Chord Thickness for Label. 16 On the Options Bar. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord.

Wood Floor Truss. Adding a new constraint. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. you can drag it to the opposing corner. When you load this family into a project. Dimensions. After you verify this. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you open the Family Types dialog. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area.18 On the Design Bar. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. When you open the Family Types dialog box. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you flex a family. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. Flexing the Component Model. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. click Save. Nesting a component. 19 Click Cancel. In this exercise. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model.rfa. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. This is not limited to length parameters. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. If you add a new material parameter. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. Adding or modifying a parameter. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 20 On the File menu. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. In the Family Types dialog box.

Level. enter 600 mm for Depth. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. under Dimensions. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . and click Apply. and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. In addition. 2 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply.

Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the dataset. When working within the Family Editor. you align and lock their position. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. After adding the chords. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. Adding Solid Geometry. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rfa. After creating the extrusions. Wood Floor Truss. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. After flexing the design. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. 6 On the File menu. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. under Elevations. you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. Click Apply. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. double-click Left. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. Click OK. click Save.

3 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 11 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. and click OK. the lines will no longer overlap. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . click Lines. click . and verify that Lock is selected. click . 6 On the Options Bar. When using the Trim tool. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click Name. and select Lock. 10 On the Design Bar. select Reference Plane: Member Left. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Lines. click .

Wood Floor Truss.rfa. double-click View 1. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. 17 On the File menu. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. click . 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. click Finish Sketch. under 3D Views. 15 On the Design Bar.13 On the Tools toolbar. click Save. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. 2 Enter SD. 3 Select the chord extrusions. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . click Apply. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. 8 In the Family Types dialog box.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. click Family Types. and click Apply. as shown. Therefore. enter 3000 for Length. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. as shown. On the Design Bar. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. enter 6000 for Length. and click OK. click Dimension.

This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. Flex the chord width. 13 In the Family Types dialog box. double-click View 1. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. In a later exercise. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . use the Align tool and add the constraint. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. 14 Click OK. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. Therefore. Later in this lesson. and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. In this particular case. under 3D Views. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. depth. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. click Family Types.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. you add the web members. enter 6000 for Length.

Click Apply. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. such as doubling. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. that allows you to easily return to the original values. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Therefore. 20 On the File menu. TIP When flexing. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. click Family Types.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. Wood Floor Truss. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. Creating Additional Solid Geometry. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. 17 On the Design Bar. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth.rfa. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. try picking a method. click Save. Click Apply. and click OK. Enter 89mm for Chord Width.

click . NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 4 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. click . 5 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. click the Hide/Isolate control. 11 On the Options Bar. click . double-click Ref. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 10 On the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left.Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click Lines. 13 On the Tools toolbar. under Floor Plans. Level. and click Hide Object. the lines will no longer overlap. 8 On the Tools toolbar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 6 On the Options Bar. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. vertical member of the center chase as shown. click . 3 On the View Control Bar. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions.

under Elevations. click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser. click Align. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. and lock the alignment as shown. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. double-click Front. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . This next process is very important. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.15 On the Design Bar. 19 For the align-to reference. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. and after the alignment. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown.

click Modify. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier. The truss should adapt to all the changes. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. select Add Parameter for Label. Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar. redo any problematic alignments and constraints. Click Apply. Click Apply. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width.22 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 29 On the Options Bar. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. If it does not.

40 On the Options Bar. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Apply. 39 On the Design Bar. click . Select Instance. 32 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. and click OK. click Lines. Click OK. under Dimensions. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. 37 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. select the upper horizontal reference plane. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 41 On the upper chord. enter19mm for Offset.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. on the lower chord. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. select the lower horizontal reference plane. and verify that Lock is selected. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. under Parameter Data. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. under Elevations. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar. double-click Right.

These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 46 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 51 On the Design Bar. select the lower horizontal reference plane. click . and click OK. click Lines. 56 On the Options Bar. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. and verify that Lock is selected. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click Left. under Elevations. 54 On the Options Bar. click . select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 53 On the Design Bar. 48 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. on the lower chord.44 On the Tools toolbar. 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Constraints. enter 19mm for Offset. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 55 On the upper chord.

62 On the Design Bar. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click . 65 On the Tools menu. under Constraints.58 On the Tools toolbar. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . click Extrusion Properties. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. click Align. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. 60 On the Design Bar. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. under Elevations. double-click Front. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. if you select the end extrusion. Make adjustments to account for the right side. 75 In the Project Browser. Click Apply. and click OK.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. double-click View 1. this is the align-to point. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. under 3D Views. and lock the alignment. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. TIP When you finish the alignments. 70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 71 On the Design Bar. If it does not. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. and lock the alignment. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. click Modify. click Family Types. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length.

A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. click Open. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. click the Training Files icon. you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. If you are comfortable with your design. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. and a rim joist. Testing the Family in a Project. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. you can continue using it in the next lesson. Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. a sill. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. It is identical to the truss you have been designing.76 Save the Family. Although you could continue using the previous family. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. After you load it into the project. NOTE Close any open families or projects.

Notice that the project file is now active.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. click the Training Files icon. you add several instances of the truss family to the project. If you had multiple projects or families open. 2 On the Design Bar. expand Families. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise. expand Structural Framing. 3 In the Project Browser.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. click Load into Projects.rfa. click Open. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Open the m_WWF1. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click m_Wood Floor Truss_1.

select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. and a wood rim joist. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 2 In the Project Browser. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . therefore. The rim joist was added as a beam. under Floor Plans. a wood sill. click Beam. 4 In the Type Selector.Southeast Isometric.Southeast Isometric. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. and double-click 3D .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the Project Browser. This project consists of foundation walls. expand Views. double-click Level 1. a slab. double-click 3D . NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. under 3D Views. expand 3D Views.

double-click Level 1. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. You do not need to be precise. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Project Browser. double-click 3D . not the wall or rim joist.Southeast Isometric. under 3D Views.Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. under Floor Plans. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square.

you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. click Edit Family. 14 On the Options Bar. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Save as. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Working with Nested Subcomponents. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . you nest wood web members into the floor truss. 10 On the Edit menu. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. click Undo Drag.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. Because the family is already open. click Yes. In the next lesson. 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Save as dialog box. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. This should return the project to its original dimension. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. 16 Proceed to the next lesson. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss.

3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. under Floor Plans. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Open the m_Wood_Web. 7 In the Type Selector. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. and click Hide Object. 2 In the Project Browser. click Hide/Isolate.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. click the Training Files icon.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Level. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. double-click Ref. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 On the File menu. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. click Component. This family is a single extrusion as shown.rfa is the active file.

13 For the align-to point. IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. under Elevations.9 On the Design Bar. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. You will align the left web component first. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . In the following steps. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . click Modify. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. 10 In the Project Browser. Do not select it. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. double-click Front. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component.

18 Add two reference planes as shown. 19 On the Tools menu.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. click Modify. 16 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. In addition. click Ref Plane. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click Align.

Place the dimension as shown. click Dimension. 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 .23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog box.In the next exercise. click Modify. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you add new parameters to control the web components. 12 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. and click Properties. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. Select Length for Type. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. click Edit/New. click Family Types. In the Type Parameter dialog box. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. 5 Click OK. or the width of the center chase. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. click OK. click Add. Select Type. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 28 In the Save As dialog box. under Parameters. length. Select Common for Discipline. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. under Parameter Data.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. 27 On the File menu. enter Depth . This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. you label these dimensions. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. select WebDepth. 26 On the Design Bar. click Save As. click Modify. under Other. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK.

Select Constraints for Group parameter under. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. 19 Under Constraints. click Add.(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. In addition. Click OK. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. under Parameters. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. Click OK. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. click Family Types. under Parameter Data. enter (Length .Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Instance. which must remain at least 150mm long. Select Length for Type. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Common for Discipline. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . Select Common for Discipline. under Parameters. click Add. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. under Parameters. 16 Under Other. This parameter is primarily for convenience. click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Length for Type. After you enter the formula. under Parameter Data. Select Instance. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array.

Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. Select Common for Discipline. Select Instance. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Click OK. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. Click OK. Select Integer for Type. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. select Webhalflength for Label. select Add parameter for Label.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameter Data. 31 Under Constraints. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Select Instance. 22 Under Constraints. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK. 29 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Parameter Data. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 25 On the Options Bar. click Family Types. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. 32 Click OK.

34 In the Element Properties dialog box. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . click OK. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. 42 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Family Types. and click Properties. If it does not. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. In the Type Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. click Modify. click Edit/New. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. select WebArrayLength. Click Apply. fix any problematic alignments and constraints.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. under Other. 39 On the Design Bar. click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. The truss should adapt to all the changes.

Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. When picking the corner. 4 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Edit menu. and click OK. add alignment constraints. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. click Save. Creating an array requires two basic steps. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. Select 2nd for Move to. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 45 On the File menu. First. under Elevations. Select Constrain. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point.44 In the Family Types dialog box. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. then you specify the move end point. you specify the move start point. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. you array the nested web components. click Array. double-click Front. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. 18 On the Tools menu. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. then select the line twice. 10 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move to. When picking the corner. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. When picking the corner. 19 In the left array. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 8 On the Design Bar. click Array. When picking the corner. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. click Align. 14 Press ENTER to complete the array. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. Enter 3 for Number. 15 On the Design Bar. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. Select Constrain. click Modify.

28 On the Options Bar. NOTE Do not select the array value. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 22 Within the right array. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 25 On the Options Bar. 21 Within the left array. select WebArrayNum for Label. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. align and lock the two right web components. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. select WebArrayNum for Label. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. If you do not lock the edges of the array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. 29 On the Design Bar.Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. click Modify. NOTE This step is very important.

you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. 34 On the Tools menu. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 . 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. This is because earlier in the tutorial. and lock the alignment as shown. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss.Notice the arrays appear to be too long. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 33 Delete the dimension. 35 Select the reference plane. Member Left. click Align. as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane. Left. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end.

click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 12000mm for Length. under 3D Views. If it does not. 37 On the Design Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. and click OK. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. under Dimensions. significant impact. however. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. click Family Types. the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 43 In the Family Types dialog box. The truss should adapt to all the changes. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. double-click View 1. in this case. this solution has little.NOTE With most beam families. and prepare the view for flexing. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 44 Click Apply. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. click Modify. if any. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. Therefore. 46 On the Design Bar. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. View 1.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. select Override parameter values of existing types. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. the project. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Reload the truss into the project. however. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. you reload the truss family into the project. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 6000mm for Length. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Reloading a Family into a Project. displays.rvt. 49 On the File menu. click Load into Projects. should be open. and click Yes. and click OK. these steps have been reduced. for training and time purposes. Click Apply. click Save. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. m_WWF1. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. In addition to the truss family. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box.

712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Materials. under Floor Plans. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. under 3D Views. Applying Subcategories. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. and Parameters In this lesson. double-click 3D . 6 In the Project Browser. 9 Proceed to the next lesson. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. click Undo Drag. Materials. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. you create and apply subcategories and materials.Southeast Isometric. double-click Level 1. 7 On the Edit menu. and Parameters. In the next lesson.4 In the Project Browser. Applying Subcategories.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. In this dataset. Open the m_WWF2. the material values were set to By Category by default. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. click Open. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. and Parameters | 713 . In addition. Materials. Within the family. you create new subcategories within the truss family.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. Applying Subcategories. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. click Edit Family. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. click Undo Object Styles. 6 In the Materials dialog box. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . it would also have the wood material applied to it. click Object Styles. If there was a metal beam in this building model. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 12 On the Settings menu. 8 On the Edit menu. notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. you have more control over component visibility within a project.2 On the Settings menu. click New. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click OK.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. 10 On the Options Bar. under Modify Subcategories. 7 In the Object Styles dialog box. In addition.Timber for Name. click Object Styles. and click OK. click Wood . all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. Notice the Wood . and expand the category Structural Framing. 13 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK.

select Other.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. The web component family opens in a 3D view. click Check None. and Parameters | 715 . select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. 23 On the Options Bar. click . enter Wood Floor Truss. and click OK. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. click . and click OK. Applying Subcategories. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. Yellow. 25 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 29 On the Options Bar. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box. Materials. under AccuRender. and click OK. under Identity Data. 27 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. select Natural. 16 In the Materials dialog box. click OK. click Edit Family. 20 In the Materials dialog box. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. 17 In the New Material dialog box. click Duplicate. Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components.No Gloss for Name. click OK. 24 In the Filter dialog box. 18 In the Materials dialog box. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss.

rvt. enter Wood Floor Truss . 46 In the Reload Family dialog box.No Gloss for Name. select Natural. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.Webs subcategory. under Identity Data. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Materials dialog box. select Wood Floor Truss .Webs for Name. 43 In the Element Properties dialog box.Webs for Subcategory.rfa. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Materials dialog box. Yellow. 36 In the New Material dialog box. select m_WWF2.Webs. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project. and click OK. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. and click OK. click . 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box. and click OK. click OK. and click OK. and click Yes. click Duplicate. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. click Load into Projects. under AccuRender. click Load into Projects. click Object Styles. 42 On the Options Bar. 41 Select the web extrusion. and click OK. click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss . select Override parameter values of existing types. 38 In the Material Library dialog box.31 On the Settings menu. click . By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. click New. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 37 In the Materials dialog box. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box.

55 On the Edit menu. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Materials.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. the stick symbols continue to display. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Save As. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. and click Yes. under Categories. 50 On the Settings menu. expand Structural Framing. Applying Subcategories. click Edit Family. 2 On the Options Bar. click Object Styles. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. under Visibility. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 53 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 57 In the Save as dialog box. and click OK. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs. 56 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. expand Structural Framing. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. however. and Parameters | 717 . Creating Material Parameters.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. under Materials and Finishes.rvt. click Add. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Common for Discipline. under Other. notice the default material is By Category. click the button to the right of the Material value field. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. Select Instance. click . Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. under Parameter Data. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. press TAB. select Floor Truss Material. 27 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. click Modify. In this case. click Edit/New. click Family Types. and click OK. click OK. 22 On the Design Bar. and click OK. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. click . 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. Select Material for Type. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. click . 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. 29 In the Materials dialog box. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. click Check None. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Load into Projects. and click OK. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. 11 In the Filter dialog box. under Materials and Finishes. 17 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 Click OK. select Floor Truss Material. 21 Click OK twice. select Metal . 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Parameters. and click Yes. do not assign a material to the parameter. select m_WWF2.Steel for Name. and select the component. When reloaded into a project. and click OK. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. click . 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 10 On the Options Bar.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box.

click Detail Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You can save the open files if you wish. Currently within the truss. a new dataset is supplied. all elements display at all times in all views. click Modify. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. 33 On the File menu. click Close. 32 On the File menu. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. 34 Close any open files. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the next lesson. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. click Open. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam. Controlling Component Visibility.31 On the Design Bar. click Save. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . click the Training Files icon. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. and click Coarse. However. Open the m_WWF3.

click Load into Projects. Under Detail Levels. 3 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. Clear Left/Right. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Click OK. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Clear Left/Right. click Visibility. 9 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Coarse. clear Plan/RCP. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. select Override parameter values of existing types. clear Coarse. click Visibility. clear Plan/RCP. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. and click OK. 8 Select the web extrusion. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Edit Family. 15 On the Options Bar.2 Select a floor truss. 6 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component. Click OK. click Visibility. clear Plan/RCP. click Edit Family. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click Yes. Under Detail Levels. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.rfa. Click OK.

click Visibility. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. and click Yes. 21 On the Options Bar. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords.rvt. select Override parameter values of existing types. click Load into Projects. 26 On the View Control Bar. double-click Level 1. clear Coarse. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click Medium. click Detail Level. and click OK. select m_WWF3. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. 27 In the Project Browser. 28 On the View Control Bar. and click Coarse. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Detail Level. Click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.

you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.29 On the File menu. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. enter 64x38 for Name. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. click Edit Family. click Save As. and click OK. click New. In the final exercise. and click Apply. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the chord changes width. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. under Family Types. 2 On the Options Bar. under Family Types. 6 In the New dialog box. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. enter 64mm for Chord Width. creating predefined types can speed up the design process. under Dimensions. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 89x38 for Name. click Family Types. and click Apply. 30 In the Save As dialog box. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. 11 Click OK. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. click New. Creating Component Types. and click OK. NOTE When creating new components. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 In the New dialog box. Creating Component Types In this lesson. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. The truss returns to its original designed value.

Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. select 64x38. and click OK. 400))) 6 Click Apply. <result-if-true>. 22 On the File menu. 18 In the Type Selector. enter 8000 for length. 350. 16 In the Type Selector. click Apply. 2 On the Options Bar. select 89x38. select m_WWF3. 20 On the Design Bar. if(Length < 7500. click Family Types. Creating Component Types | 723 . Notice the truss depth increases.Southeast Isometric. 400. click Load into Projects. Notice the two beam types. click Modify. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. click Edit Family. 21 In the Project Browser. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. double-click 3D . 286. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. if(Length < 9000. click Beam. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. under 3D Views. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length.rvt. click Save. under Dimensions. and click OK. Creating Conditional Formulas. select Override parameter values of existing types. enter 6000 for length. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. and click Apply.

Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. 16 On the File menu. select Override parameter values of existing types. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. double-click 3D .Southeast Isometric. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Save. click Load into Projects. double-click Level 1. and click Yes. select m_WWF3. You have completed this tutorial. and click OK. under 3D Views. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. 17 Close any open files. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box.Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth.rvt. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate.

Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. Finally. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. 725 .

you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Open the c_Area. If you are using metric units. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. expand Views (all). you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. select mm.rvt file located in the Common folder. click the Training Files icon. In the Area Settings dialog box. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. under Length. click Open. select Millimeters. it is not necessary in this exercise. For Unit Suffix. 3 Under Area. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. 726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click Project Units. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. In the final exercise. These schemes define spatial relationships. Click OK. select m2 Click OK. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. and click Area Analysis. expand Floor Plans. select Square meters. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. For Unit Suffix. click Area Settings. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. For Rounding. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. select 2 decimal places. your values will be different. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click OK. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.

Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. click Area Tag. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. If you select No. click the Room Calculations tab. or 0. 12 In the Project Browser. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. Click OK. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. under Views (all). ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. the system-computed height defaults to the level. click Area Plan. Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. you must manually add these boundary lines. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. ■ 8 Click Cancel. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. forming a closed loop. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. When you select Yes in this dialog box. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line.

18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. click Area Plan. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. you create a new area plan for rentable space. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Click OK. Next. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. click Area Boundary. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. and store area. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. common areas. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls.

22 On the Design Bar. click Area Tag. you can either draw them or pick them. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. When you pick the walls. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. 26 On the Options Bar. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 24 On the Design Bar. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model. click Modify. If you do not select this option. click . Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 .20 On the Options Bar. When you add area boundary lines.

click Area Tag. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Click OK. Click OK. Click OK. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. 28 On the Design Bar. In the Element Properties dialog box. 30 On the Design Bar. click . 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Office area for Area Type.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. click Modify and select the tag. 31 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name.

Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. and select Store Area for Area Type. enter Core for Name. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 .34 Add an area tag to the building model core. Notice that within the two store areas. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Color Fill. and when the color legend displays. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click to place it. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. name the project Area-in progress.rvt. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . click Save. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. In the next exercise. and click Save. In this exercise. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar.36 On the File menu.

5 In the New Schedule dialog box. under Category. click the Fields tab. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. select Area Type and click Add. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 7 Under Available fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . and click OK.3 When the dialog box displays. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box. select Areas (Rentable). Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .

and roofs. floors. 735 . Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you then need to update the building face. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. In this tutorial. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. you can specify the view to display massing elements. building elements. After you make building elements. If you modify a massing face. or both. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. At any time. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. curtain systems.

under Floor Plans. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click Massing. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Lines. sweeps. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. under Views (all). 4 On the Design Bar. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. Open the m_Massing_Start. click Create Mass. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Open. floor. and cutting geometry. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. and floors. You assign the default wall. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. roofs. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing .Using Massing Tools In this lesson.

enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 11 On the Design Bar. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. click Lines. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. click Finish Sketch. under Views (all). and click OK. Using Massing Tools | 737 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . and click 16 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 1. click Extrusion Properties. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 21 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.7 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. 23 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. 9 In the Materials dialog box. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. on the Options Bar. and then click . enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. 19 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 12 On the View toolbar. under Constraints. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. click . 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar.

click Lines. select Pick a plane. TIP If necessary. 26 On the Design Bar. highlight the larger form. Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 29 Click to select the face. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. 28 In the drawing area. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click on the Options Bar. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. double-click {3D} to see the results.24 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). The second form is on top of the first form. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click OK. double-click West. under Views (all).

and delete the vertical construction line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and click to select the line start point. Next. 37 On the Design Bar. click the arrow next to the drawing options. TIP If you do not see this option. Using Massing Tools | 739 . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 35 On the Options Bar. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. click . you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click . 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown.32 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click . 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Edit toolbar.

under Elevations (Building Elevation). click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. click Finish Sketch. under Views (all). . 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . 48 On the Design Bar. . click Blend Properties. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 50 On the Design Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. double-click East. 51 On the View toolbar. click Lines and. 43 In the Project Browser. 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 44 On the Design Bar. click 47 Create an arc as shown. and click OK. click Edit Top. 46 On the Options Bar. click .40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar.

7 Using the same technique. 1 In the Project Browser. click and enter 15000 for Offset. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. under Views (all). Using Massing Tools | 741 . you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. select the mass. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Ref Plane. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.52 Proceed to the next exercise. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. m_Massing_Start. under Floor Plans. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar.rvt. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. 2 In the drawing area. as shown. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. 4 On the Options bar.

9 On the Design Bar. click and select Chain. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 19 On the File menu. click Finish Mass. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. under Materials and Finishes. 17 On the View toolbar. click Finish Sketch. and 0 for Extrusion Start. 12 On the Design Bar. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element.rvt. click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion. 15 Click OK. click . 18 On the Mass Design Bar. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 Under Constraints. click Extrusion Properties. on the Options Bar. When sketching each extrusion. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. click Lines and. snap the corners to the intersections. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. on the View Control Bar. and then click Hidden Line. click Save As. In this exercise.

and click OK. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. and 9000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. you create new family types from a mass family file. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. and 6000 mm for Depth. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 18000 mm for Height. under Other. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 10 On the File menu. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. 11000 mm for Height. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Finally. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 3 In the Name dialog box. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 9 Click OK. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. click Open. Open Box. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 . and click Apply. enter 15000 mm for Width.rfa. click Family Types. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. and click Apply.rfa. click Save As. click New. 12000 mm for Height. and click OK. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and 18000 mm for Depth. In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file.

6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. 9 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. You also load other existing mass families and place them.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 3 On the View Control Bar. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. Semi Barrel Vault. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. under Floor Plans. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.rfa family files. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Place Mass.rfa. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 1 If not already selected.rfa. 7 Open the Box-Training. 4 On the File menu. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Arc Dome. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon.rfa. and Triangle. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. under Views (all). Open the m_Massing_In-place. 2 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. click Open.

19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. and click OK twice. enter 90 for Angle. select the 3 boxes. 18 Press CTRL. select Rotate after placement. 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify.11 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Selector. 12 Select the box. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 22 On the Options Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. and click OK twice. 21 In the Type Selector. select the triangle. 24 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. click Place Mass. 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. and click . 26 In the drawing area. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. and click to place the mass. click Modify. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. and click .

32 Select the box and click . In this exercise. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. click Place Mass. click Orient ➤ Northeast. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. 35 On the View menu. click . In the next exercise. and click OK twice.27 Select the triangle. 30 In the Type Selector. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK twice. 34 On the View toolbar. you join these mass elements. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.

rvt file. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. 4 Select the triangle. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 . you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. and then press ESC to see the result.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. . click . 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. NOTE When you join geometry.

10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. under Floor Plans. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. double-click Site.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. enter SM. on the Edit toolbar. under Views (all). click for Axis. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing . click 8 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown.

17 Press ESC to see the result. you joined mass elements together. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. click . 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. In this exercise.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. and then select the triangle.

you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Place Mass. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. double-click Site. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. under Views (all). click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. select Rotate after placement. 10 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Window menu. clear Curved. 8 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 7 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. select Sloped (primary). click . you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. 1 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place.rvt. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. enter 90 degrees for Angle. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. and select the triangle mass element.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. and then click OK.

23 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. double-click North. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.13 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. and click . and click Wireframe. select the three arc domes. 24 On the View Control Bar. and click OK twice. and click Wireframe. click . select the 2 semi barrel vaults. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. 18 In the Type Selector. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. under Views (all). click Modify. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. and click . 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . 21 In the drawing area. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. 14 In the drawing area. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar.

select Curved and. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. 36 On the File menu. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. and click OK. 29 In the Project Browser. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. select Curved. 32 Click the value for Design Option. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. select Curved from the Design Option menu. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options.rvt. clear Sloped. click . under Views (all). 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. you can make it the primary option. click the Design Options tab. click Make Primary. double-click {3D}. In this exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. you placed mass elements into Design Options. under Option. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. and click OK. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 30 On the View menu. click .

you pick massing faces to create walls. 5 In the Type Selector. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line.Brick on CMU.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. 3 On the View menu. click the Training Files icon. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click to show the massing model. double-click {3D}. click Open.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 On the View toolbar. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Wall by Face. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. 6 On the Options Bar. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. click Orient ➤ Southeast.

double-click Level 5. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. Click Wall by Face. 12 On the Design Bar. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. under Views (all). under Views (all). click Wall by Face. double-click Level 1. 9 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 15 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. double-click Level 3. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Views (all).8 In the Project Browser. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing .

You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click . 22 Select all the faces shown in red.18 Select all the faces shown in red. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. double-click Level 9. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . 20 On the View Control Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. under Views (all). In this exercise. If desired. click Wall by Face. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Wireframe. you pick massing faces to create floors. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise.

clear Curtain Panels. and click OK. 756 | Chapter 22 Massing . Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. and Walls. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 4 Click OK. under Views (all). double-click {3D}.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 2 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. click Floor Area Faces. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt.

and click OK. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. clear Exclude Options. select Levels 1-4. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 9 Press CTRL. click Floor Area Faces. 10 On the Options Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 .8 On the View menu.

13 Press CTRL. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. 14 On the Options Bar. under Views (all). 16 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. click . 21 On the View toolbar. click Create Floors. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. click Floor Area Faces. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select Level 1. click Floor by Face. and click OK. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected. double-click Mass Schedule. 20 On the Options Bar. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. under Floor Plans. 18 On the Options Bar.

under Views (all). 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar.rvt.In this exercise. click Roof by Face.

6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. select Basic Roof : Generic . Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Visibility/Graphics. 11 On the View menu. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. and Walls. and then click OK.4 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Panels. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element.400mm. Curtain Systems. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. click Create Roof. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected.

3 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. click Curtain System by Face. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 5 Press CTRL. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 .rvt. double-click {3D}. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 4 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.In this exercise.

7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.6 On the Options Bar. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Create System.

9 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 .8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. select the blended form on the in-place mass. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. click Create System. In this exercise. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. 10 Click Modify to exit the command.

rvt. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK. Curtain Systems. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. and Walls. click Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. Next. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. Roofs. under Views (all). clear Curtain Panels. click Duplicate. double-click Site. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Edit/New. 2 On the View menu. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 30000 for Width. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . click OK.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and then click OK. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Model Categories tab. Floors.

13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Exclude Options. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Modify. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 .10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.

you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Remake. 19 On the View toolbar. you want to select the smaller one. under Views (all). click OK. double-click Level 1. 15 In the Project Browser. click . remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. In the next steps. under Floor Plans. TIP To select the curtain wall.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 17 On the Options Bar. Also. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box.

you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 .

you changed the size of an existing mass family.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. In this exercise. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and click Remake. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.rvt. 1 Open the 3D view.

If desired. 3 In the Project Browser. to the building shell. 5 On the View menu. 6 On the Model Categories tab. such as columns and an extruded roof. In this exercise. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . click All to select all categories. This concludes the massing tutorial. 4 Rename the view 3D . 7 Clear one of the check boxes.Massing only. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click on the 3D view. 8 Click None to clear the selection. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. 9 Select Mass. and click OK. You might create the model shown.

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project. 771 .

Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.Using Site Tools In this lesson. and double-click Site. islands. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. In the second part of this exercise. Open the m_First_Project. This project file was created using the default metric template. and walkways. right-click in the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . click Point. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. click Toposurface. click the Training Files icon. 3 On the Design Bar. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. Using the first method. expand Views (all). Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. convert the data to a table. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. You add property lines manually. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. and click Site. and then modify the data. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a toposurface using two different methods. In the final exercises.

9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Use the following illustration as a reference. 8 On the Options Bar. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Using Site Tools | 773 . enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration.

under Increment. Use the following illustration as a reference. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box. This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 14 On the View toolbar. enter 1500 mm. under Additional Contours. 12000 mm. click . and click OK.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. 12 On the Settings menu. click Finish Surface. 11 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style. click Site Settings. 15 On the View Control Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 15000 mm.

DXF. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. 21 Click the Level 2 text. 28 On the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. under Views (all). 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. and press ENTER. click Yes. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. modify the level names and elevations. double-click Site. select Preserve colors. 23 Click the Level 1 text. click Modify. Under Layer/Level Colors. 29 Select the imported topography. Using Site Tools | 775 . Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). and double-click South. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. 19 On the Design Bar. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. and click OK. click to delete it. SAT. Until it is exploded. Under Import or Link. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. it is considered an import symbol. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. Before importing the contour data. 25 On the File menu. click the elevation value. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Click Open. rename the level Base Site Elevation. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. DGN. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box. on the Standard toolbar. 18 In the Project Browser. enter 1000 mm.16 On the View toolbar. click Modify. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. rename the level Basement.

click the Annotations Categories tab. select it. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed.30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. 32 On the View menu. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . When you select the import symbol. click Toposurface. 31 On the Design Bar. when the edges highlight. and then click OK. and click OK. 34 Under Visibility. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. clear C_INDX. click Pin Position. clear Elevations. 36 On the Design Bar.

this project file is required in its current state. Adding Property Lines. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. click Save As. 42 On the View toolbar. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 43 On the File menu. click . Adding Property Lines In this exercise. name the project Site-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. Using the second method.rvt.39 On the Design Bar. and click Save. Using the first method. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. click Finish Surface. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. you add property lines using two methods. Using Site Tools | 777 . 40 On the View toolbar.

select Create property lines by sketching. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. If you have not completed the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. 6 On the Design Bar.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. click Lines. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. do so before continuing. Site-in progress. Click Modify. click Lines. and click OK. Using the 3-point Arc tool. add an arc line on the right. On the Design Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Property Line. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

select the lines. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. click 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the warning dialog box. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. click Property Line. A warning dialog box is displayed. select Edit Table. 15 Starting in Row #1. and click OK. to delete them. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . when they highlight. click OK. click OK. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar. on the Standard toolbar.

25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box.Notice that after you complete the last line. The tags display more prominently in this view. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder. right-click in the Design Bar. and click OK. 23 In the Tags dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. and click Drafting. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. click Model Graphics Style. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. click Tag. 19 In the Tags dialog box. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 20 Click Load. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click the Imported Categories tab. 26 Under Visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 31 On the View Control Bar.dwg and click OK. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and open the folder. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 28 On the Options Bar. Before adding property line segment tags. and click Shading with Edges. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 16 Click OK. clear Leader. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 24 On the View menu. click Training Files. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. click to place it. If the gap is not closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click to place the property lines.rfa and click Open. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible.

click Model Graphics Style. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data.rvt. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. In the next exercise. In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. click New. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Site-in progress. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. enter the name Working Contour. and click OK. click Object Styles. you created two sets of property lines. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Using Site Tools | 781 . 2 On the Settings menu. In the Object Styles dialog box. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. and click Wireframe.32 On the File menu. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. this project file is required in its current state. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. In the final step. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Save. you loaded and tagged the property line segments.

9 In the Site Settings dialog box. select Working Contour. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. select a shade of Brown. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. click Close. enter 1000.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. In this exercise. The object style subcategory. 7 Click OK. 10 Under Additional Contours. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. Working Contour. Under Range Type.0 mm. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. Under Line Color. select Dash dot. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . Click Yes when prompted to save changes. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Subcategory. 12 On the File menu. The next exercise requires a new dataset. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Creating Topographic Subregions. 11 Click OK. Under Line Pattern. click Site Settings. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Single Value. under Contour Line Display.

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and islands. parking areas. Using Site Tools | 783 . you create subregions in order to define roads. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.In the next exercise. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open the m_Site. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. click the Training Files icon. you create topographic subregions to define roads. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. parking areas.rvt file located in the Metric folder. click Open. click Subregion. try to replicate the location and proportion. and islands. NOTE In the Metric dataset. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. such as material. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. click Lines. Although the exact dimensions are not important. 2 On the Design Bar.

select Site . click Finish Sketch. click the Value for Material. enter Parking for Name. under Identity Data. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. click Shading with Edges. expand Schedules/Quantities. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . the toposurface and its contour data remain one element.Tarmacadam for Name.Tarmacadam. and double-click Topography Schedule. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. and click OK. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Properties. 9 On the View menu. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. 8 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. under Materials and Finishes.

Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. 22 In the upper-right parking area. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. 18 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Subregion. double-click Site. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. In this training project. click Model Graphics Style. click Edit Boundary. Using Site Tools | 785 . Within each subregion. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. and click Shading with Edges. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule. and click Hidden Line. click Finish Sketch. 16 On the Design Bar. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 21 On the Design Bar. they display within this schedule. Delete overlapping lines. 17 On the View Control Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. As you create new subregions. click Lines. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. Notice that the project area has increased. click Model Graphics Style. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. double-click Site. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. click the Value for Material. Name each region Island . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. under Schedules/Quantities. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. double-click Topography Schedule. 28 In the Project Browser.Grass.Grass for Name. under Identity Data. You must sketch each region separately. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Materials dialog box. click Finish Sketch. under Materials and Finishes. select Site . enter Island .Grass for Name. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. click Properties.Grass.23 On the Design Bar. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . and apply the material Site . and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 In the Project Browser.

walkway.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser. 33 On the Design Bar. and apply the material Concrete . Name the subregion Walkway. click Finish Sketch. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Lines.30 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. click Subregion. 32 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Design Bar. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. Using Site Tools | 787 .

Grading the Toposurface. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.rvt. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. 37 On the File menu. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. click Save As. Notice that the schedule has been updated.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. under Schedules/Quantities. 788 | Chapter 23 Site . 36 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Save.rvt. double-click Topography Schedule. this project file is required in its current state. When you use the grading tool. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. there is still only one toposurface. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress.

7 In the Graded Region dialog box. 3 On the Options Bar. and click Select and Edit. select Copy Internal Points. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. Using Site Tools | 789 . see the tutorial. A warning dialog box is displayed. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. under Floor Plans.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. click . 2 Select the toposurface. click Graded Region. 8 Select the topographic surface. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. select Existing for Phase Created. and click OK. under Phasing. Using Phasing. 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Site.

10 Press DELETE. 790 | Chapter 23 Site .Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. and new. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. demolished.

Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. and click Hidden Line. Using Site Tools | 791 . click Model Graphics Style. click Point. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration.11 On the View Control Bar. 13 Press DELETE.

click View Properties. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display.17 On the Design Bar. click . click Finish Surface. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 20 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 19 On the View Control Bar. click . and click Shading with Edges. 18 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.

it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify.22 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Phasing. and click OK. Only the graded topography displays. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. If you have an existing building model. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. Adding a Building Pad. and delete it. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Pad. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 26 On the File menu. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Lines. Therefore. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. NOTE By default. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. Site tutorial-in progress. under Phasing. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. Using Site Tools | 793 . 23 Select the toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt. you can delete it. 24 On the View menu. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. specify New Construction for Phase. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. When you add a building pad. only the original toposurface displays. click View Properties. and click OK. specify Existing for Phase. click Save. the Pick Walls command is active. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. you create a building pad. this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click Site.

click Finish Sketch. and click Shading with Edges. 7 On the View toolbar. click pad. 6 On the View Control Bar. . Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . click 8 On the View toolbar.5 On the Design Bar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. . click Model Graphics Style.

10 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save.9 On the File menu. and select the parking space.90 deg. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 3 In the Type Selector. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Using Site Tools | 795 . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Adding Site Components. click Parking Component. Adding Site Components In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . you add parking and planting components to the site surface. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. this project file is required in its current state. click Modify.

click Site Component. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. . double-click Site. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 12 In the Type Selector. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 8 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. click 9 On the View toolbar. click spaces. choose any tree type.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space.

Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. 15 On the View toolbar. click . 14 On the View toolbar.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Using Site Tools | 797 . click . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Hidden Line. double-click Site. In the following illustration.rvt. 16 On the File menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. this project file is required in its current state. click Apply. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. Tagging Site and Parking Components. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 5 On the View menu. In the following exercise. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box.NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Apply. and click OK. Site tutorial-in progress.

7 On the File menu. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. select Parking for Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Add. 7 Under Fields. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select Type. and click Add.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. and under Heading. If necessary. click Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Space. 4 Under Available fields. and click OK. this project file is required in its current state. and under Heading. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click the Fields tab. select Mark. Creating Parking Space Schedules. select Type. The parking schedule is displayed. you create a parking schedule. and click OK.rvt. Site tutorial-in progress. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 6 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. enter Size. 8 Under Fields. Using Site Tools | 799 . click Schedule/Quantities. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 Under Available fields.

double-click Site. 15 On the File menu. click Close Hidden Windows. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. 12 In the Site plan. 11 On the Window menu. number the first three spaces consecutively. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Parking Schedule. under Views (all). 800 | Chapter 23 Site . 13 In the Parking Schedule. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 10 In the Project Browser. click Tile. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule.9 On the Window menu. click Save. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. under Space.

and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. In this tutorial. place. You can also nest groups within other groups. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. or with those working on a different project. and modify repetitive units. you not only simplify their placement. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. all instances in the building model are updated. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. you also simplify the modification process. 801 . It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. For example. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. By grouping objects. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects.

and click Save. expand Groups. and select the bed. name the file Grouping-in progress. classrooms. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. and expand Model. 8 Enter Typical guest room. and typical office layouts. 6 In the Project Browser. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. click .Creating Groups In this lesson. desk. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. 7 Right-click Group 1. expand Floor Plans. and press ENTER. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. expand Views (all). Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL. and click Rename. click Save As. and two nightstands.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. Creating a Group In this exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. Open the m_Grouping. click Open.rvt. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click Level 2. 9 On the File menu. chair. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. 5 On the Edit toolbar. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. After you create a model group. Placing a Group. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

7 On the Edit toolbar. You also mirror an existing instance of a group. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. 5 On the Options Bar. as shown. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection.Placing a Group In this exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. A second instance of the group is added to the drawing.rvt. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. select the group. Creating Groups | 803 . click . Grouping-in progress. select the original instance of the group. click Finish.

When you finish the editing routine. 2 On the Options Bar. Modifying a Group. as shown. 1 In the drawing area. click Save. Modifying a Group In this exercise. you make changes to a single instance of a group. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Edit Group. Grouping-in progress.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. 9 On the File menu. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group.rvt.

The new group is considered nested within the host group. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. 7 On the Design Bar. click . and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . When you make changes to a nested group. Creating Nested Groups. click Save. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. and select the desk and chair. 4 On the Edit toolbar. click Finish Group. 8 On the File menu. 9 Proceed to the next lesson.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. 3 Press and hold CTRL. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. All other elements in the model are grayed out. the host group is also updated.

rvt. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 2 On the Edit toolbar. right-click Group 1. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. In the selection. Grouping-in progress. The new group is then nested within the original group. you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. click . 3 In the Project Browser. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. expand Groups. and click Rename. which acts as the host. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. and press ENTER. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. expand Model.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise.

Because the modified group is nested. select the Typical toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. everything else is available for selection. 3 In the drawing area.rvt. all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. 8 On the Design Bar.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. Modifying a Nested Group. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. click Edit Group. click Component. Grouping-in progress. 9 On the Options Bar. When you edit the group to add the component. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. 10 In the drawing area. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. verify that Multiple is clear. click Save. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . 12 On the File menu. The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. click Add To Group. click Finish Group. and all instances are updated to include the nested group.

click Edit Group. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. 10 In the drawing area. 7 Press TAB. click Add To Group. click Finish Group. and select the nested toilet room group. 5 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. select the sink. 8 On the Options Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

Working with Groups | 809 . and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. and press ENTER. When you load the group from the library into a new project. In subsequent exercises. having created a group that represents a typical layout. and click Rename. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. Working with Groups In this lesson. You then place the new group in the building model. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. After you finish the modified group. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. and click Duplicate. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. 3 Enter Corner guest room. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. under Groups. 12 On the File menu. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. click Save. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. Grouping-in progress. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change.rvt. You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. you add door tags to a group. right-click Typical guest room. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. Working with Groups. Lastly. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation.

select Corner toilet room. click Finish Group. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. to specify the group origin. and select the desk and chair. 16 Select the same toilet room group. 7 After a warning message displays. click Remove From Group. click Finish. 11 On the Edit toolbar. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. select the Corner guest room group. 13 On the Design Bar. click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. click . 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. and press DELETE. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 10 Press and hold CTRL. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. and drag it into the corner guest room. 15 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 14 Select the toilet room. 9 On the Options Bar. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

29 On the File menu. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. 20 On the Options Bar. 22 In the drawing area. and click to specify the end point. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. click . Creating a Detail Group. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. click 26 On the Options Bar. click Finish Group. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. 19 In the drawing area. enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. select the Corner guest room group. 25 On the Edit toolbar. 21 On the Design Bar. select the Corner guest room group. 18 On the Options Bar. A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model. for Axis. select the Corner toilet room group. click Edit Group.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. click Finish to finish placing the group. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. click Add To Group. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. past the exterior wall. Working with Groups | 811 . click Save. 23 On the Design Bar.

click Text. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping . you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. click Filled Region. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. and click Modify on the Design Bar. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. click to add an arc leader. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. click Finish Sketch. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Grouping-in progress. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. click to draw a rectangular region. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 10 Enter Tile.rvt.

as shown. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. and click Rename. Working with Groups | 813 . 12 On the Edit toolbar. Because the detail group contains variables. Using Attached Detail Groups. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. click . under Floor Plans. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. 3 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. clear Leader.rvt. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. click Tag. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. and press ENTER. and expand Detail. expand Groups. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Grouping-in progress. 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. as shown. 20 On the File menu. double-click Level 3. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. click Save. 14 Right-click Group 1. you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 2. and select the note and the filled region. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group.

A warning dialog box is displayed. press and hold CTRL. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. click Place Detail. expand Attached Detail. and press ENTER. press TAB. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. and click Rename. and click OK. select Door tags. click . and expand Typical toilet room. expand Groups. 8 In the Project Browser. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. 10 Enter Door tags. click Modify. 9 Right-click Group 1. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. and select the two door tags. 7 On the Edit toolbar. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group).5 On the Design Bar.

under Template file. 14 On the File menu. expand Groups. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. click OK. Working with Groups | 815 . click Save.rte file located in the Metric folder. 6 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New ➤ Project. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. and click Open. as shown. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. 13 Select Typical toilet room. click Wall. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. click OK. click to specify the start point of the square. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the drawing area. click to draw a square.rvg. click Browse. 10 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. drag it into the drawing area.rvt. and click Open. Grouping-in progress. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 5 In the New Project dialog box. the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. select Typical toilet room. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. therefore. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. navigate to the directory where you saved the group.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. and expand Model. 3 Click Save. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. Saving and Loading Groups. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square.

3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Automatically Creating a Group. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the drawing area. click Finish. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. Loaded_Group. and click Save. 2 On the Edit toolbar. except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. click . click Save. select the instance of Typical toilet room. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. 15 On the File menu.

Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. a warning dialog box is displayed. click Close. 6 On the Design Bar. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. click Modify. 7 On the File menu. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. Working with Groups | 817 . click Create new group types. 5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. and click OK. 4 In the warning dialog box. click Fix Groups. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton. 819 . you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. After completing level 1.Structural 25 In this tutorial. In the final lesson. You begin by adding the structural walls. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. and beams to Level 1. columns.

Open the m_Structural. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Open. click the Training Files icon. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). This file is used in the next exercise. to trace the initial set of structural walls.rvt. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. go to the Project Browser. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. Select Current view only. 8 On the File menu. select Automatically place. Adding Structural Walls | 821 . click the Training Files icon. Select All for Layers. under Import or Link. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. DXF. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 7 Click Open. SAT. and select Origin to origin. 6 Under Positioning. After you trace the walls. 2 On the File menu. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. and double-click Level 2. If necessary. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. click Save As. In this exercise. Sketching Structural Walls. and select m_wall-import. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. you imported a DWG file.dwg from the Metric folder. DGN. select Invert colors.

and click Structural.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Structural Wall. First. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural .200mm. 5 In the Type Selector. proceed to Step 2. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Structural_tutorial. Right-click the Design Bar. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. rather than the height. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. In addition. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Basic Wall: Generic .

8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. In the steps that follow.6 On the Options Bar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. 10 Move the cursor to the right. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. and click the next line intersection. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Specify Level 1. Adding Structural Walls | 823 . and click to specify the wall endpoint. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. Click . 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

expand Views (all). and double-click Level 2. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. and click to complete the chain of walls. expand Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. in the View toolbar.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. click . 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. 824 | Chapter 25 Structural . 13 On the View toolbar. TIP If necessary. Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify to finish the sketch.

click Structural Wall. click Modify to end the wall chain. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . 19 On the View toolbar. click . ■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C.

21 On the View menu. click Structural Wall. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. select Basic Wall: Generic . and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics.200mm. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural . 23 Under Visibility. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the right extent of the arc. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 26 On the Options Bar. click the Imported Categories tab. This is the left extent of the arc. clear m_wall-import. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. click . 25 In the Type Selector. 28 On the Options Bar. Click to create a three-point arc. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.dwg. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. double-click Level 2.

If it is not. and press ENTER. click Modify. 32 On the Design Bar. click the value. Adding Structural Walls | 827 . enter 1500. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm.29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown.

click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. clear Chain. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. enter 1500. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . and press ENTER. 36 On the Design Bar. you create the final structural walls for the project. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. 35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. In the steps that follow. Both walls are 1200 mm long.

click . Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. click Modify. 41 On the View toolbar. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . 40 On the Design Bar.

click Dimension. click Save. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. In the next exercise. You then make minor modifications to their position. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. In this exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. double-click Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. in its current state. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. This project file is required. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural .42 On the File menu. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. Structural_tutorial. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls.

Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. select it. click Modify. Adding Structural Walls | 831 . the Options button becomes available. Select Entire Walls for Pick. After you select Entire Walls. click Options to specify the wall pick options. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall.4 On the Options Bar. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . 6 Move the cursor to the left. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. On the Options Bar. and click to place the dimension as shown. In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. select Intersecting Walls. and when it highlights.

11 Click the temporary dimension value. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal. Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.

click Undo Edit dimension length. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. you add structural columns. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. joists. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. 13 On the File menu. click Save. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . This project file is required. several different beam types. In the next lesson. In this exercise. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. 12 On the Edit menu. in its current state.

under Floor Plans. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In addition. you use the grid intersection tool. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. TIP When adding the column. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. and Level 2. If necessary. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 1. and you place a column outside of the grids.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. 2 On the View menu. click Structural Column. 4 In the Type Selector. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. select Height. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. zoom in to place the column.

TIP To create the crossing selection. and select grids 1-5. 9 Use a crossing selection.7 Add similar columns to C2. click Grid Intersection. C3. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. and C5. and A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5.

10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. zoom out until you can see all the grids. 15 On the Options Bar. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 14 If necessary. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. click Finish. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. This completes this set of columns. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . Columns A3-5 are shown below.

click Structural Column. 19 On the Options Bar. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. 20 On the Design Bar.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. click Modify. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. B3-5 are shown below. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Grid Intersection. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Modify. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it.

to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you add structural beams to the building model. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . In this exercise. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. in its current state. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. you used various methods to add structural columns. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 On the View menu. This project file is required. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. you add beams manually. 26 On the File menu. Adding Structural Beams and Girders.25 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. click Beam. Structural_tutorial. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. 4 In the Type Selector. expand Floor Plans. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. As you use the beam tool. click Save. In the next exercise. double-click Level 2. click . expand Views (all). you specify the start and endpoint of the beam.

7. click Beam. click Modify.7 On the Design Bar. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 11 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 10 In the Type Selector. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. select Girder for Usage. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. and then move the cursor up to grid A.

Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. click Grid. When you use the grid tool to place beams. Use the following table for other conditions. if a beam is joined column-to-column. For example. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder.Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 14 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural .

17 On the Options Bar. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. press and hold CTRL. click Modify. click the temporary dimension value. and press ENTER. 23 On the Options Bar. click Finish. click Beam. 24 Select grid 3. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 . 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. click Grid. 18 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. enter 8200. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

Click column B5 to add the first beam. 25 On the Options Bar. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. and for Usage. 28 On the Options Bar. select Girder for Usage. Press ESC to end the chain.Notice beams are added between columns. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. click Finish. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. select Chain. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. In addition. select Girder. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural .

Press ESC to end the chain. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. click Finish. You can also use the shortcut key. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. 33 Select grid A. click Grid.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. 30 On the Options Bar. Press ESC to end the chain. select Girder for Usage. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. to snap only to intersections. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. 34 On the Options Bar. connecting the column at B4. SI.

36 On the Options Bar.7 beam had crossed grid A.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. click Finish.The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. 38 On the Options Bar. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . 37 Select grid B. 39 On the View toolbar. click Grid. If the W310x32. click . it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first.

48 On the View toolbar. click . 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). click Modify. double-click Level 2. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 43 In the Type Selector.Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 . and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. select Girder for Usage. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. 47 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. In the steps that follow. 46 Move the cursor to the right. click Beam.

and select Chain. select Girder. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. for Usage. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 52 In the Type Selector. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. double-click Level 2. Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. In the steps that follow. 53 On the Options Bar. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. click Beam. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. and click when it intersects grid 2. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural .

click . Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. and click when it intersects grid 1.56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 57 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 .

click Beam.7. Structural_tutorial. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. You then create a joist array. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. For example. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists.B3 quadrants. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. click W310x32. you add joists. and purlins to the building model. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins. 2 Zoom around the A1 . You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams.58 On the File menu. M_W-Wide Flange. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. in its current state. Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. click Save. In this exercise. Structural Framing. double-click Level 2. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. This project file is required. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. under Families. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. 4 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

In addition. 8 With the beam selected. click on the Options Bar. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam.6 On the Design Bar. click Array. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. click Modify. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu.

Clear Group and Associate. Enter 14 for Number. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Select 2nd for Move to. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Once the direction is set. 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A.12 On the Options Bar.

Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 .Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown. click Beam. 17 Add a W310x32. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin.

Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. 21 On the Options Bar.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. click Array. Clear Group and Associate. joists. Enter 7 for Number. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 20 On the Edit menu. Select 2nd for Move to. style. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . and purlins. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. and color within the Object Styles dialog box. This is the array start point. and click.

27 On the Options Bar. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. clear all options except Structural Framing. 26 In the Filter dialog box. click .The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 25 On the Options Bar. and click OK. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . click .

click Save. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. This project file is required. click Modify. and notice the connection symbols display. in its current state. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. 854 | Chapter 25 Structural . you create new levels. In this exercise. 29 On the Design Bar. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. 30 On the View toolbar. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. click . 31 On the File menu. In the next lesson.

6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You need at least 3 meters of space. 5 On the Options Bar. select Make Plan View. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Select grid 1. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . Click to add Level 3.Defining New Levels In this exercise. click Level. expand Elevations. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. you create several new levels. under Views (all). and double-click Building Elevation.

In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. you created three new levels. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. Duplicating the Existing Design. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Structural_tutorial. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . 8 On the File menu. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. This project file is required. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. Each level is 3000 mm high. click . in its current state.In the Project Browser. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar.

Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. click OK. 5 On the Edit menu. 3 On the Edit menu. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. press and hold CTRL. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. Make sure the entire building model is included. click Modify. click Copy to Clipboard. click Modify. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. 8 On the Design Bar. and select Levels 3 and 4. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. select Level 2. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box.

Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. double-click Building Elevation.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . you create a framing elevation. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click Save. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. In the next lesson. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. In this exercise. 10 On the File menu. in its current state.

6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. click Framing Elevation. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 . Elevation 1-a. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. You can now view the new elevation. double-click Level 2. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. Structural_tutorial. in the Project Browser. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.

860 | Chapter 25 Structural . you add c-channel bracing to the building model. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. This project file is required. in its current state. In the next exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.Notice the stick framing representation. You are ready to add the structural braces. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. 7 On the File menu. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Save. Structural_tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. In this exercise. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. you add structural braces to the building model. Adding Structural Braces.

2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you use point-to-point insertion. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.4. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable. select the view crop box. and using the shape grips. NOTE If necessary.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. When adding the braces. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 3 In the Type Selector. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. click Brace. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints.

Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar.The brace displays. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. click Modify. Select Constrain. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. Enter 4 for Number. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. Select 2nd for Move to. click Array. Clear Group and Associate. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . The second brace is displayed.

16 On the View toolbar. click Tag All Not Tagged.14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select Structural Framing Tags. and click OK. click .

you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array. In this exercise.17 On the File menu. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Save.

Using Worksharing. In this tutorial. You can enable Worksharing for any project. called Worksharing. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. stairs. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. and so on. however. All other team members can view this workset. floors. 865 . They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. they cannot make changes to it. doors. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. such as walls. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. A workset is a collection of building elements. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose.

In the next exercise. When setting up Worksharing. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. you can select which worksets are open or closed. and click Editable. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. select the desired workset. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. In a multi-story structure. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. When you are working on a shared project. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Elements specific to a view. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. go to the Worksets dialog box. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. To make a workset editable. Working in a shared project In a shared project. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. Instead. you must first enable Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you specify an active workset. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. such as annotations and dimensions. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. such as a tenant interior. After the project is shared. The first time you activate worksets within a project. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. After learning the fundamentals. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files.

When creating the new worksets. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. if a workset named Interior was created. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. Shared Levels and Grids. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. and View worksets. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. You should have at least one workset for each person. In most projects. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. ■ Team member roles Typically. Experience has shown that. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. not including the Project Standards. As new members create worksets for their own use. for a typical project. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. the file is saved as the central file. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. On this tab. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. Regardless of the default setting. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. When you create a new workset. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. For example. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Generally. each team member has control over a portion of the design. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. Therefore. designers work in teams. with each assigned a specific functional task. By subdividing the project based on these task roles.

The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. When you save to the central file. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. When you save to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. This makes them available to other team members. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you make that workset editable by you. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you can select which workset is active. however. proceeds as usual. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. within the local file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. After saving to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. When you save locally (to your local file). You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. make any required worksets editable. In this situation. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. However. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. This is called “Selective Open. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. your changes propagate to the entire team. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. you work no differently then you would in the office. As you work. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. your changes are saved. On the Options Bar. they are not propagated to the rest of the team.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. When finished or at regular intervals. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. if you know who checked out the required workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. In this instance. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. save to the central file. and then save the local file. When working remotely. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. you should then save to your local file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file.

In this conceptual exercise. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. using VPN. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. click the Training Files icon.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you should check out the Materials workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. To do this. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. click Worksets. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 . you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. and make that workset editable. for instance. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. click Open. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.rvt file located in the Common folder. In the next exercise. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Alternatively. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. Open the c_Worksets. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu.

click New. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. For training purposes. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Project Standards. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. and click OK. under Show. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. Your username displays as the present owner. imagine four users including yourself. clear Visible by default in all views. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. currently named Workset1.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. In this case. turn off Families. 10 Click New. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. In this simple training project. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. you can rename the default workset. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. 13 Click Rename. 9 Click OK. and Views. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Only User-Created worksets should display. it is better to make them visible by default. select Workset1. another is assigned the interior layout. Therefore. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. 6 Under Show. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. and notice all are editable by you. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box.

expand Views (all). 24 Select all of the interior elements. 20 Click OK. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. select Interior Layout for Workset. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. including the interior doors. however. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. and click OK. and double-click Level 1. You do. under Identity Data. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. In this training file. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box.14 In the Rename dialog box. 21 Select one of the interior walls. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. click . 15 In the Worksets dialog box. click . Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 22 On the Options Bar. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. click OK. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. When you initially activate Worksharing. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. stairs. expand Floor Plans. and walls. type the name Exterior Shell. 17 In the drawing area.

28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. under Identity Data. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click .25 On the Options Bar. click the Worksets tab. If any interior elements remain. 36 On the Options Bar. select all of the interior elements of the building model. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. 31 On the View menu. 34 In the Project Browser. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click the Worksets tab. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. click . 33 Select Interior Layout. 27 On the View menu. under Identity Data. 30 Click OK. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. click Save As. and click OK. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. 35 In the drawing area. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. under Views (all). 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Floor Plans. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. double-click Level 2. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . click Visibility/Graphics.

under Open Worksets. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. In addition. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. 40 Click Save. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . 39 In the Save As dialog box. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. click Open. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. make modifications to the building model. 44 Click OK. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. select the central file and. If you have not yet completed the exercise.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Now that you have created the central file. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. click Worksets. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. select Specify. you create your local file. Next. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Close. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. make sure you remember the location of this central file. and click OK. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. you enabled Worksharing on a project. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. please do so before continuing. 2 In the Open dialog box. and click Save. click Save As. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. click Options. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. click Non Editable. 6 In the Save As dialog box. click Worksets. 45 On the File menu. 3 Click Open. and click OK. In this exercise. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. 5 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. check out worksets. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 42 In the Worksets dialog box.

10 In the Worksets dialog box. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 11 Click OK. 22 On the File menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. In this case. and select Yes for Editable. however. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. you can still edit this wall. select Interior Layout for Name. 17 On the Options Bar. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. If this is selected. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. expand Floor Plans. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. If it was owned by another user. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. 20 On the Options Bar. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. click . notice the Editable Only option. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. expand Views (all). click Modify.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. 12 On the Window menu. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. select Interior Layout. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 19 Under Constraints. and click OK. 23 Click OK. 21 Click OK. In this case. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. Before working on the model. click . On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. In the Worksets dialog box. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. under Identity Data. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. Verify that it is cleared. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. you should activate the Worksets toolbar.

click Wall. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. click Door.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 28 In the Type Selector. 33 In the Type Selector. The precise location is not important. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 . and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. click Modify. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously.126mm Partition (2-hr). select Basic Wall: Interior . 30 On the Design Bar. 25 Delete the door. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

You modified the building model. and save locally immediately afterward. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . displays the workset as well as the element type. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. save to central. a tooltip. you should perform regular saves. If you have not yet completed these exercises. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. make elements editable. At the end of a work session. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). it is recommended. In the following section of this exercise. please do so before continuing. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. By default. which matches the information in the Status Bar. two users access the central file through a network connection. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. leave this file open in its current state. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. Whenever you save. checked out worksets. For training purposes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. each user must check out worksets. When working in your local file. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. In this exercise. click Save to Central. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session.34 Using the following illustration as a guide. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. Throughout the process. In this particular case. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. you should relinquish all worksets. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. skip the following section. add two door openings into the rooms you created. Borrowed Elements is selected. In addition. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. you created your local file. and reload the latest changes.

and click OK. click Options. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. 3 On the Settings menu. consider that person to be User 1. 11 In the Save As dialog box. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. For training purposes. and select Yes for Editable. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 7 In the Open dialog box. 14 On the File menu. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and reset the Username to your computer login name.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select all the User-Created worksets. click Open. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . select Specify. 4 Click the General Tab and. specifically sequenced. 16 Click OK. In addition. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. instructions are staggered. User 2: Create a local file. return to the Settings dialog box. click Options. This file is for your use only. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and click OK. You now have a local copy of the project. 8 Click Open.rvt. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. You are now the owner of that workset. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. select the central file and. under Username. 10 On the File menu. enter User 2. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. and click Save. under Open Worksets. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. click Worksets. click Save As. This is a system setting. and click OK. one user has already created a local file. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive.

select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. and double-click Level 1. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box. 28 Click OK. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. click Save to Central. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 18 On the File menu. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. and select Yes for Editable. it becomes the active workset. If you only have one workset checked out. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. and double-click Level 1. 23 In the Project Browser. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.User 1: Check out worksets. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. expand Floor Plans. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. If it is not open. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. 22 Click OK. expand Views (all). 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . modify the building model. 26 On the File menu. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. open it now.

48 On the Design Bar. Therefore. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. The changes User 2 made are apparent. and click OK. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Before adding any furniture. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. Click Yes. click Visibility/Graphics. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. under Views (all). select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 43 On the Project Browser. click the Worksets tab. 41 Select Furniture Layout. When you save to central. 36 On the File menu. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. and click Duplicate. under Floor Plans. right-click Copy of Level 1. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. 32 On the File menu. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. choose any desk. 45 On the Project Browser. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. and click OK. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 .A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1. 42 On the Project Browser. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. User 1: Reload latest worksets. However. click Component. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click inside any room. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. and click OK. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. 49 On the View menu. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. you should create a furniture plan view. 40 On the File menu. 38 Click OK. click Save to Central. 47 In the Type Selector. click Worksets. click Modify. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 34 Click OK.

52 On the File menu. and click OK. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. 59 In the Rename dialog box. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. click Reload Latest. leave this file open in its current state. 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. click Rename. and save 68 On the File menu. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. modified the building model. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. 54 Click OK. In the final exercise of this tutorial. under Show. and click Properties. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. Checking out worksets. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box. click Save to Central. and click OK. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. and published their changes back to the central file.200mm. click Edit/New. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. 69 On the File menu. click Save to Central. leave this file open in its current state. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 65 On the File menu. select Reload Latest. select the following. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. select Save to Central. Each user checked out worksets. User 1: Reload latest. select Project Standards. enter Exterior Wall . ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 64 Click OK. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. click Worksets. 60 Click OK twice. 61 On the File menu. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box.

click Options. As each of you work. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. select Make this the Central location after save. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). Set the Username to User 2. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. and click OK. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. and click OK. At the appropriate point in this exercise. and click OK. There are specific instructions for each user. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . and click Save. 7 On the File menu. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. throughout this training. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. This exercise requires two users and. click Open. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. click Save As. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. click Save As. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. 9 In the Save As dialog box. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). click Options. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. you save the dataset as a central file. 3 In the Save As dialog box. and these problems are rectified. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 5 Click Save. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. click Options. and still have your local files open. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. The central file should still be open. In subsequent steps. Each user must have network access to the central file. On the Settings menu. you need to set up your central and local files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. finished the previous workset exercises.rvt file located in the Common folder. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. This is the local file for User 1.

any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 17 On the File menu. select the Interior Layout workset. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 25 Under Active Workset. and then click OK. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. verify that Editable Only is cleared. and click Save. Next. You are now the owner of that workset. click Options. click Worksets. select them. click Worksets. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. Afterwards. and click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. You are now the owner of that workset. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. and select Yes for Editable. 31 On the left exterior wall. This is a system setting. 15 Click Open. double-click Level 1. You have created a local file which is for your use only. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Open. select the second window from the top. and then click OK. click Open. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. select Interior Layout. 14 In the Open dialog box. select Exterior Shell. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. if any User-Created worksets are not open. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. click Save As. and click OK. select Specify. 28 Under Active Workset. In addition. 13 On the File menu. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. 18 In the Save As dialog box. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. return to the Settings dialog box.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. under Floor Plans. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 30 On the Options Bar. and select Yes for Editable.

35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. A message informs you that your request has been granted. click the File menu. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. 37 Click Close. 36 Click Grant. and click Editing Requests. 39 Click OK. and notice the window is in the new location. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. After you submit the request. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. At this point. click Check Now. select the request submitted by User 2. User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box.

select the following. you requested permission to edit the element. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and close 40 On the File menu. to Local. In this case. In this multi-user exercise. select Save to Central. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. and the other user granted it.User 1 and 2: Save to Central. and click OK. click Close. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user.

Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. 885 . These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. In this tutorial. Using design options. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file.

you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. For example. In the final exercise of this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. each with multiple design options. you can edit it. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. you learn how to manage and organize the design options.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. click New. 886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. make your final design decision. In addition. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). In this particular case. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. In the first exercise in this lesson. the only available command is to create a new option set. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. click the Training Files icon. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. you design each of the structural options. click Open. Open the m_Urban_House. At any time in the design process. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. In the second exercise. The client has asked you to create various options. and each option set can have multiple schemes. and delete the unwanted options from the project. After you create a design option. under Option Set. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you can have multiple sets of design options. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 2 In the Design Options dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder. With the second option. you set up multiple design option sets. After you and the client agree on the final design. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options.

click Modify. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. In the following illustration. 11 On the Edit toolbar. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. the roof and structure systems must work together. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . and the third column centered between the two. and double-click ROOF TERRACE.TIP In this exercise. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. select: ■ ■ ■ . The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. or add a dimension string between the columns. 5 On the View menu. 4 In the Project Browser. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). By selecting Multiple. click 12 On the Options Bar. therefore. click Edit Selected. click Column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 3 Select Option 1 (primary). and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. 9 On the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. each is constructed for interchangeability. TIP To center the middle column. add three columns. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and click Close. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process.

they are difficult to see in this view. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. Because of the size of the columns. A copy of the three selected columns is added. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. When you are finished. using the same technique. 17 Zoom out and. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. 18 On the View toolbar. Notice the 12 columns that you added.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one.

19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Modify. The first click specifies the beam start point. Use the following illustration as a guide. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. 21 In the Type Selector. you add the beams that span the columns. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. click . select Round Bar : 50mm. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . In it.Next. Zoom in on the upper right column. 23 On the Design Bar. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 25 On the Edit toolbar. click Beam. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. The second click specifies the end of the beam. double-click TOP OF CORE. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.

and select the center of the column to add a copy. move down to the next set of columns. select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and click the center point. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof.26 On the Options Bar. click . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column.

35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. and click OK. 32 In the Design Options dialog box. under Option. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 38 In the Rename dialog box. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. 36 In the Rename dialog box. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . click New. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. enter Structure for New. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). not a new option set. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. click Rename. under Option.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. and click OK. enter Beam for New. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. 37 Select Option 2 and. click Rename. click Rename. 40 In the Rename dialog box. under Option Set. enter Brackets for New. under Option.

click Rename. click Rename. and click OK. select Option 2. Under Now Editing. name the option Louvers. 43 In the Rename dialog box. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. under Option. 41 Under Option Set. name the option Sunscreen. you create the second design option. 46 Under Option. 45 Under Roofing. click New. enter Roofing for New. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Rename. There should now be two roofing design options. under Structure. select Edit Selected. 47 Under Roofing. When finished. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. and click OK. 48 Under Option.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. under Option Set. This allows you to more easily manage the project. select Beam. it will resemble the following illustration. select Option 1 (primary). Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. click New. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. and click OK. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names.

Refer to the following illustration. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. 58 On the Tools menu. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown.53 In the Project Browser. The second click represents the plane that is moved. double-click ROOF TERRACE. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. click Component. under Floor Plans. 56 In the Type Selector. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 . select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. click Align.

Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The first click sets the move start point. on the Edit toolbar.60 After aligning the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. The second click represents the move end point. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. click Modify. 61 On the Design Bar. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 62 Select the beam and.

You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. 68 In the Design Options dialog box. each with multiple design options to pick from. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. the other for beams. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial.66 On the View toolbar. you need this file in its current state. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. click . you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. Cr